JVC Satellite TV System HM DSR100RU User Manual
D-VHS DIGITAL SATELLITE RECORDER  
HM-DSR100U  
HM-DSR100DU (with Antenna Kit)  
HM-DSR100RU (without Antenna Kit)  
SAT TV D-VHS AUX  
POWER  
TV/VCR  
MODE  
MUTE  
MENU  
MTP  
NTSC  
ᮡ
CH  
B
R
O
W
S
INFO  
T
H
MENU  
E
M
E
SELECT  
E
SELECT  
D-VHS  
E
T
ᮢ
CH  
VIEW  
2
™INDEX  
INDEX£  
1
3
SKIP AUTO TRACK SKIP  
4
5
8
0
6
REC  
REW  
FF  
POWER  
REW/BROWSE  
FF/BROWSE  
2
3
q
7
9
RECALL  
ADDRESS  
TV/VCR  
8
EJECT  
POWER  
REC  
PAUSE  
TIMER  
EP  
PAUSE  
STOP  
PLAY  
COUNTER RESET  
6
5
VIDEO (MONO)L–AUDIO–R  
REC  
TM  
For Customer Use:  
Enter below the Serial No. which is  
located on the rear of cabinet. Retain  
this information for future reference.  
INSTRUCTIONS  
Model No.  
Serial No.  
LPT0002-0H9C  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
IMPORTANT PRODUCT  
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS  
Electrical energy can perform many useful functions. But improper  
use can result in potential electrical shock or fire hazards. This  
product has been engineered and manufactured to assure your  
personal safety. In order not to defeat the built-in safeguards,  
observe the following basic rules for its installation, use and  
servicing.  
ANTENNA INSTALLATION  
INSTRUCTIONS  
1. Outdoor Antenna Grounding  
If an outside antenna or cable system is connected to the product, be  
sure the antenna or cable system is grounded so as to provide some  
protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges. Article  
810 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70, provides  
information with regard to proper grounding of the mast and  
supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire to an antenna  
discharge unit, size of grounding connectors, location of antenna  
discharge unit, connection to grounding electrodes, and  
requirements for the grounding electrode.  
ATTENTION:  
Follow and obey all warnings and instructions marked on your  
product and its operating instructions. For your safety, please read  
all the safety and operating instructions before you operate this  
product and keep this booklet for future reference.  
2. Lightning  
For added protection for this product during a lightning storm, or  
when it is left unattended and unused for long periods of time,  
unplug it from the wall outlet and disconnect the antenna or cable  
system. This will prevent damage to the product due to lightning and  
power-line surges.  
INSTALLATION  
1. Grounding or Polarization  
(A) Your product may be equipped with a polarized alternating-  
current line plug (a plug having one blade wider than the other).  
This plug will fit into the power outlet only one way. This is a  
safety feature.  
3. Power Lines  
An outside antenna system should not be located in the vicinity of  
overhead power lines or other electric light or power circuits, or  
where it can fall into such power lines or circuits. When installing an  
outside antenna system, extreme care should be taken to keep from  
touching such power lines or circuits as contact with them might be  
fatal.  
If you are unable to insert the plug fully into the outlet, try  
reversing the plug. If the plug should still fail to fit, contact your  
electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. Do not defeat the  
safety purpose of the polarized plug.  
(B) Your product may be equipped with a 3-wire grounding-type  
plug, a plug having a third (grounding) pin. This plug will only  
fit into a grounding-type power outlet. This is a safety feature.  
If you are unable to insert the plug into the outlet, contact your  
electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. Do not defeat the  
safety purpose of the grounding-type plug.  
EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING AS PER  
NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE, ANSI/NFPA 70  
ANTENNA  
LEAD IN WIRE  
2. Power Sources  
GROUND CLAMP  
Operate your product only from the type of power source indicated  
on the marking label. If you are not sure of the type of power supply  
to your home, consult your product dealer or local power company.  
If your product is intended to operate from battery power, or other  
sources, refer to the operating instructions.  
ANTENNA  
DISCHARGE UNIT  
(NEC SECTION  
810-20)  
ELECTRIC SERVICE  
EQUIPMENT  
GROUNDING  
CONDUCTORS  
(NEC SECTION 810-21)  
3. Overloading  
Do not overload wall outlets, extension cords, or integral  
convenience receptacles as this can result in a risk of fire or electric  
shock.  
GROUND CLAMPS  
POWER SERVICE GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM  
(NEC ART 250. PART H)  
NEC – NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE  
4. Power Cord Protection  
Power supply cords should be routed so that they are not likely to be  
walked on or pinched by items placed upon or against them, paying  
particular attention to cords at plugs, convenience receptacles, and  
the point where they exit from the product.  
5. Ventilation  
Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for ventilation. To  
ensure reliable operation of the product and to protect it from  
overheating, these openings must not be blocked or covered.  
• Do not block the openings by placing the product on a bed, sofa,  
rug or other similar surface.  
• Do not place the product in a built-in installation such as a  
bookcase or rack unless proper ventilation is provided or the  
manufacturer’s instructions have been adhered to.  
6. Wall or Ceiling Mounting  
The product should be mounted to a wall or ceiling only as  
recommended by the manufacturer.  
Page ii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
USE  
1. Accessories  
To avoid personal injury:  
• Do not place this product on an unstable cart, stand, tripod,  
bracket, or table. It may fall, causing serious injury to a child or  
adult, and serious damage to the product.  
• Use only with a cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table recommended  
by the manufacturer or sold with the product.  
• Use a mounting accessory recommended by the manufacturer and  
follow the manufacturer’s instructions for any mounting of the  
product.  
SERVICING  
1. Servicing  
If your product is not operating correctly or exhibits a marked  
change in performance and you are unable to restore normal  
operation by following the detailed procedure in its operating  
instructions, do not attempt to service it yourself as opening or  
removing covers may expose you to dangerous voltage or other  
hazards. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel.  
2. Damage Requiring Service  
Unplug this product from the wall outlet and refer servicing to  
qualified service personnel under the following conditions:  
a. When the power supply cord or plug is damaged.  
b.If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen into the product.  
c. If the product has been exposed to rain or water.  
d.If the product does not operate normally by following the  
operating instructions. Adjust only those controls that are covered  
by the operating instructions as an improper adjustment of other  
controls may result in damage and will often require extensive  
work by a qualified technician to restore the product to its normal  
operation.  
• Do not try to roll a cart with small casters across thresholds or  
deep-pile carpets.  
2. Product and Cart Combination  
A product and cart combination should be  
moved with care. Quick stops, excessive  
force, and uneven surfaces may cause the  
product and cart combination to overturn.  
PORTABLE CART WARNING  
(Symbol provided by RETAC)  
e. If the product has been dropped or damaged in any way.  
f. When the product exhibits a distinct change in performance—this  
indicates a need for service.  
3. Replacement Parts  
3. Water and Moisture  
When replacement parts are required, be sure the service technician  
has used replacement parts specified by the manufacturer or have  
the same characteristics as the original part. Unauthorized  
substitutions may result in fire, electric shock or other hazards.  
Do not use this product near water—for example, near a bath tub,  
wash bowl, kitchen sink or laundry tub, in a wet basement, or near a  
swimming pool and the like.  
4. Object and Liquid Entry  
4. Safety Check  
Never push objects of any kind into this product through openings  
as they may touch dangerous voltage points or short-out parts that  
could result in a fire or electric shock. Never spill liquid of any kind  
on the product.  
Upon completion of any service or repairs to this product, ask the  
service technician to perform safety checks to determine that the  
product is in safe operating condition.  
5. Attachments  
Do not use attachments not recommended by the manufacturer of  
this product as they may cause hazards.  
HOW TO USE THIS INSTRUCTION  
MANUAL  
● All major sections and subsections are listed in the Table Of  
Contents on page iv. Use this when searching for information on a  
specific procedure or feature.  
● The Index on pages I–1 lists frequently-used terms, and the  
number of the page on which they are used or explained in the  
manual.  
6. Cleaning  
Unplug this product from the wall outlet before cleaning. Do not use  
liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners. Use a damp cloth for cleaning.  
7. Heat  
The product should be situated away from heat sources such as  
radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other products (including  
amplifiers) that produce heat.  
BEFORE YOU INSTALL YOUR NEW  
VCR . . .  
. . . please read the sections/literature listed below.  
● ”Cautions”  
● ”Important Products Safety Instructions” on the previous pages  
Page iii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
T
Important Product Safety Instructions .................................................... ii  
Chapter 1: Introduction.......................................................................... 1-1  
Welcome!.................................................................................................................... 1-1  
Highlights................................................................................................................... 1-1  
About Satellite Television ......................................................................................... 1-2  
About D-VHS.............................................................................................................. 1-3  
Unique All-In-One Design ......................................................................................... 1-3  
If You Are Installing Your System Yourself ............................................................. 1-3  
Features Overview .................................................................................................... 1-4  
Available Services ..................................................................................................... 1-5  
Quick Start Tips ......................................................................................................... 1-6  
Chapter 2: The Parts of Your System ................................................... 2-1  
The Recorder ............................................................................................................. 2-1  
The Remote Control .................................................................................................. 2-7  
The Satellite Antenna .............................................................................................. 2-14  
Chapter 3: Getting Started..................................................................... 3-1  
Using the Remote Control ........................................................................................ 3-1  
Turning On the System ............................................................................................. 3-4  
Changing Channels................................................................................................... 3-4  
Canceling a Procedure ............................................................................................. 3-5  
About Menus and Other Multiple-Choice Screens................................................. 3-6  
The Main Menu ........................................................................................................ 3-10  
The System Setup Menu......................................................................................... 3-10  
Local TV Link ........................................................................................................... 3-13  
Chapter 4: Using the System................................................................. 4-1  
About the Program Banner ...................................................................................... 4-1  
About the Browse Banner ........................................................................................ 4-3  
About the Program Guide......................................................................................... 4-6  
About Themes ......................................................................................................... 4-11  
Ordering Pay Per View Programs .......................................................................... 4-13  
Favorites Lists ......................................................................................................... 4-14  
Security Features .................................................................................................... 4-19  
Electronic Mail ......................................................................................................... 4-30  
Software Upgrades.................................................................................................. 4-31  
Viewing Programs In Other Languages ................................................................ 4-33  
Setting Up Channel Order ...................................................................................... 4-35  
Diagnostic Tests ...................................................................................................... 4-36  
Programming the Remote Control......................................................................... 4-39  
Equipment Codes for Programming the Remote ................................................. 4-44  
Page iv  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User and  
Installation Guide  
Chapter 5: VCR Features ....................................................................... 5-1  
Cassettes and Recording Modes ............................................................................. 5-1  
Simple Playback and Recording .............................................................................. 5-1  
Playback Features ..................................................................................................... 5-6  
Recording Features................................................................................................. 5-17  
Using Caller ID ......................................................................................................... 5-20  
Event Timers ............................................................................................................ 5-22  
Editing to or from Another VCR ............................................................................. 5-33  
Editing from a Camcorder ...................................................................................... 5-34  
Chapter 6: Starting Your Installation .................................................... 6-1  
Introduction ............................................................................................................... 6-1  
Before You Start Installation .................................................................................... 6-3  
Components of the Satellite Antenna...................................................................... 6-4  
What You Need .......................................................................................................... 6-6  
Optional Installation Kit ............................................................................................ 6-7  
Finding the Satellites ................................................................................................ 6-9  
Discussion of Potential Mounting Sites ................................................................ 6-13  
Chapter 7: Installing and Wiring Your System..................................... 7-1  
Installing the Satellite Antenna ................................................................................ 7-1  
Grounding and Wiring the Satellite Antenna .......................................................... 7-8  
Aiming the Antenna For the Strongest Signal...................................................... 7-12  
Connecting the Recorder to a Telephone Line ..................................................... 7-15  
Ordering Your Programming .................................................................................. 7-17  
Wiring Your System Together................................................................................. 7-18  
Manual Clock Setting .............................................................................................. 7-25  
Appendix .................................................................................................A-1  
FCC Compliance....................................................................................................... A-1  
National Electrical Code (NEC) ............................................................................... A-3  
Glossary .................................................................................................................... A-7  
Problems and Solutions Tables ............................................................................ A-10  
Questions and Answers......................................................................................... A-23  
Specifications ......................................................................................................... A-24  
For Servicing .......................................................................................................... A-25  
Warranty .................................................................................................................. A-26  
Index ......................................................................................................... I-1  
Page v  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
1
WELCOME!  
Congratulations on your selection of this satellite television system. Thank you for your  
purchase. You will be pleased with the performance, capabilities, entertainment options,  
and ease of operation of your system for many years to come.  
Your system complies with MPEG II and DVB standards for compressing audio and video  
data. Your system also features an advanced new recording technology called D-VHS,  
which records digital MPEG II satellite signals as digital data.  
This means that the system will be compatible with new technologies in consumer  
electronic products as they arrive on the market, including DVD Video Disc players and  
data communication networks.  
FOR MORE INFORMATION:  
To subscribe to programming, or for assistance with installing or using the system, call  
the DISH Network Service Center at 1-800-333-3474, or see the DISH Network's home  
page at http://www.dishnetwork.com on the World Wide Web.  
For warranty service, or for information about the features and operation of the HM-  
DSR100DU/RU call JVC at 1-800-252-5722.  
For more information on JVC products, see JVC's home page at http://www.jvc.com on the  
World Wide Web.  
HIGHLIGHTS  
You have purchased the most advanced, easy-to-use satellite dish system available today.  
Here is a list of some of the features that make this system powerful, yet simple enough for  
anyone to use:  
ࡗ
 Bit Stream (D-VHS) Recording: The recorder features the new D-VHS format  
which records digital satellite broadcasts as digital signals, so programs can be recorded  
"as is" with no loss of quality.  
ࡗ
 IRR (Integrated Receiver-Recorder): This HM-DSR100, which is commonly  
referred to as "recorder" in this manual, is actually an integrated unit which has a  
satellite receiver, VHF/UHF receiver, and video recorder (VHS and D-VHS formats)  
built in. This all-in-one design greatly simplifies set-up and operation of the unit.  
ࡗ
 Easy Timer Programming: DISH Network's Program Guide provides an easy way  
TM  
to look through all the programs currently being broadcast by DISH Network , and  
even lets the user program the built-in VCR's timer to record any program on the list by  
choosing it.  
ࡗ
 UHF/IR Universal Remote Control : The UHF remote, you can use the remote to  
control the recorder from another room, or even from another floor in the building. The  
IR remote uses infrared light to control the TV, audio components, and other compatible  
equipment.  
ࡗ
 Local TV Link: In the past you had to compromise quality, or use external switching  
devices to select between the satellite channels and your local broadcast channels. Now  
you can attach the TV antenna or cable line directly and access those channels using the  
Program Guide, the same way you access satellite channels.  
Page 1-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User and  
Installation Guide  
ABOUT SATELLITE TELEVISION  
Satellite television uses satellites orbiting in geosynchronous orbit over the Earth to deliver  
television and audio programming. "Geosynchronous" means that the satellites stay aligned  
over one place on the surface of the Earth. Once your satellite antenna is aimed at the  
satellites, the antenna does not have to move to follow the satellites.  
The programming signal is transmitted to the satellites from a facility on the ground called  
the "Uplink Center." The satellites then transmit the signal to your antenna.  
The signal your system receives is customized for you based on the programming or  
information services you have ordered.  
To receive network services, you must have a satellite antenna and receiver installed that are  
compatible with the network.  
To order pay per view programs using your system, you must connect the recorder to an  
active telephone connection. The recorder stores information on your pay per view  
purchases, and transmits this information to the Service Center every few days.  
Satellites  
Your Location  
Uplink Center  
Telephone Connection  
Service Center  
Page 1-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
About D-VHS  
1
ABOUT D-VHS  
The "D" in D-VHS represents Digital Data. As this name suggests, D-VHS is an extension  
of the world's most popular VHS home video format, which adds new digital recording  
(storage) capabilities that make it an ideal match for digital broadcasts.  
Like VHS, D-VHS is a tape-based format. Unlike VHS, D-VHS records digital signals as a  
digital bit stream (data) which is compatible with the MPEG II and DVB standards utilized  
by your satellite system. Since digital data is stored "as is", there is no loss of quality  
compared to the original satellite broadcast. D-VHS also offers high capacity, enabling  
"storage" of up to 5 hours of recorded material per cassette.  
And since you will want to continue enjoying all of the regular VHS tapes you've recorded  
or accumulated, the D-VHS also offers conventional analog (VHS) recording and playback  
in addition to digital.  
The relationship between type of broadcast, cassette used, and resulting recording is as follows:  
Broadcast  
Cassette  
Recording  
Digital Satellite D-VHS  
Digital Satellite VHS  
D-VHS (bit stream)  
VHS (analog)  
VHS (analog)  
VHS (analog)  
Local  
Local  
D-VHS  
VHS  
Notes:  
ࡗ
 Recording on Super VHS tape:  
Make sure you turn the "D-VHS" recording mode off if you intend to record a digital  
satellite recording on a S-VHS cassette. We recommend that you only record digital "bit  
stream" signals on D-VHS cassettes.  
ࡗ
 Playing back D-VHS recording made on other D-VHS VCRs:  
D-VHS recordings made on other VCRs may not playback on your JVC VCR. This is  
because other D-VHS VCRs may record satellite signals from a system that is not  
compatible with your DVB/MPEG II DISH system.  
UNIQUE ALL-IN-ONE DESIGN  
In addition to the two-way D-VHS/VHS capabilities of the built-in VCR, the recorder offers  
expanded viewing options with simplified operation thanks to the two built-in tuners.  
Incorporated into the recorder unit are a satellite receiver for satellite broadcast reception,  
and a VHF/UHF tuner for local broadcast reception. This all-in-one design serves to  
simplify the connections necessary for installation, and makes recording and viewing  
operations easier too.  
IF YOU ARE INSTALLING YOUR SYSTEM YOURSELF  
If you are installing your system yourself, Chapters 6 and 7 describe how to unpack and  
install the antenna and recorder. There is also an optional installation kit available. To buy  
the installation kit, contact the location where you purchased your system or call the Service  
Center. See What You Need on page 6-6 for more information.  
Page 1-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User and  
Installation Guide  
FEATURES OVERVIEW  
For more detailed information, see Chapter 2 – The Parts of Your System.  
STANDARD FEATURES  
ࡗ
 Recorder  
The IRR (Integrated Receiver-Recorder) features an all-  
in-one design that makes it easy to install and operate.  
ࡗ
 Remote Control  
This remote control is specifically designed for easy  
access to the menus.  
ࡗ
 Simple Menu Operation  
ࡗ
 On-Screen Program Guide  
ࡗ
 Themes  
Simple "highlight and select" options allow quick, easy  
navigation and programming.  
Use the Program Guide to find out about upcoming  
events and order special programs.  
You can display a list of those programs within a theme,  
such as movies or sports.  
ࡗ
 Favorites Lists  
Favorites Lists let you set up a list of your favorite  
channels for faster channel selection.  
ࡗ
 System/Parental Locks  
ࡗ
 Electronic Mail  
Prevent your kids from viewing programs you deem  
unsuitable.  
Occasionally, you may receive electronic mail regarding  
new features or services.  
ࡗ
 Audio-only Programming  
ࡗ
 CD-Quality Sound  
A number of channels feature commercial free audio-  
only programs.  
The best possible sound quality is available.  
ADVANCED FEATURES  
ࡗ
 Event Timers  
Some systems can alert you when a program you want to  
watch is about to start.  
ࡗ
 Caller ID  
If you have Caller ID through your phone company, use  
this system to display the Caller ID information on your  
TV.  
ࡗ
 Local TV Link  
Use Local TV Link to add local broadcast or cable TV  
channels to the Program Guide.  
Page 1-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
Available Services  
1
AVAILABLE SERVICES  
Your system is capable of receiving a wide range of exciting and entertaining services.  
The available services encompass an unlimited variety of interests, including movies,  
sports, news, music, shopping, comedy, and more. Call the Service Center for more  
information on any of these.  
ࡗ
 Subscription Services are program channels or services that you purchase for extended  
periods; they are billed at regular intervals; they remain activated until you call the  
Service Center to terminate them.  
ࡗ
 Package Services are groups of services offered to you at a discount; they provide the  
greatest value to you because they combine the services that you wish to activate at a  
reduced rate.  
ࡗ
 One-Time Services are special broadcast events and other purchases you use once;  
they include pay per view programs, installation and repair charges, and merchandise  
purchases.  
Ⅲ
A Pay Per View program is one that you buy once, and that is billed once on your  
account for a single viewing; the fee varies depending on the specific program you  
purchase, and is added to your next invoice.  
Ⅲ
Installation, Activation, and Repair Services are one-time, non-broadcast charges  
billed to your account following the completion of a service, such as when an  
authorized technician installs your system or when an authorized repair facility  
performs non-warranty repairs on your equipment (see Limited Warranty on page  
A–26 for more information).  
Ⅲ
Ⅲ
Merchandise Services are shop-from-home products that you purchase via the  
Service Center; they provide you with an easy and convenient way to purchase a  
wide array of consumer products.  
Local TV link in addition to the wide range of satellite services you can receive  
broadcast or cable TV channels.  
Page 1-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User and  
Installation Guide  
QUICK START TIPS  
This is a quick reference to start common procedures:  
Change Channels  
If you are watching a program,  
press the Up or Down arrow  
button, or enter the channel  
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
number using the number buttons.  
MENU  
Open the Main Menu  
Press the Menu button.  
Press the Guide button.  
Open the Program  
Guide  
B
Open the Browse  
Banner  
Press the Browse button.  
R
O
W
S
E
Order a Pay Per  
View Program  
Select the program using the Program Guide  
or a Themes list, and follow the instructions.  
RECALL  
See the last channel  
you viewed  
Press the Recall button on the remote control.  
Press repeatedly to alternate between the last  
two channels viewed.  
COUNTER RESET  
Select a program based  
on a theme  
Press the Theme button, or if the  
Main Menu is open, select the  
Themes option. Select the  
T
H
E
or  
M
E
theme. Select the program.  
2
Themes  
See information about  
a program  
Press the Info button while using the  
Program Guide, Browse Banner,  
Themes, or while viewing a program.  
Read your electronic  
mail messages  
1. Press the Menu button.  
MENU  
2. Select the Mail option.  
3. Select the mail message.  
3
Mail  
4. Delete the mail message after  
reading.  
Activate a Favorites  
List  
1. Press the Guide button to open the  
Program Guide.  
2. Press the Guide button again to  
select the next Favorites List.  
Page 1-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Parts of  
Your System  
2
THE RECORDER  
THE RECORDER FRONT PANEL  
ACCESS DOOR  
CASSETTE LOADING SLOT  
ᮡ
CH  
INFO  
MENU  
SELECT  
D-VHS  
TM  
ᮢ
CH  
REC  
REW  
FF  
POWER  
2
3
q
TV/VCR  
8
EJECT  
POWER  
REC  
PAUSE  
TIMER  
EP  
PAUSE  
STOP  
PLAY  
6
5
VIDEO (MONO)L–AUDIO–R  
The recorder front panel provides control buttons, plus access to the Smart Card slot.  
ACCESS DOOR  
The Smart Card slot is behind this door. The recorder is shipped with the Smart Card pre-  
installed in this slot. Do not remove the Smart Card for any reason.  
The recorder works only with the Smart Card installed. Do not remove the  
Smart Card. Keep the access door closed to prevent damage to the Smart  
Card. The Limited Warranty does not cover replacement of Smart Cards that  
you lose or damage.  
CASSETTE LOADING SLOT  
A "VHS" or "D-VHS" video cassette is loaded into or ejected from this slot.  
D-VHS INDICATOR  
The D-VHS indicator illuminates when a digital satellite broadcast is being  
D-VHS  
received and a D-VHS cassette is loaded, and when playing back a tape that  
has been recorded in the D-VHS mode.  
TM  
LIGHT  
The dish light illuminates when a digital satellite broadcast is being  
TM  
received.  
POWER BUTTON  
Press the Power button to turn the recorder ON or OFF.  
POWER  
Page 2-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User and  
Installation Guide  
POWER LIGHT  
POWER  
The POWER light illuminates when the recorder is turned ON.  
This light flashes when the recorder memory contains  
unread mail messages.  
REC LIGHT  
REC  
The REC light illuminates while a tape is being recorded.  
This light blinks during Instant Timer Recording (ITR).  
PAUSE LIGHT  
PAUSE  
The PAUSE light illuminates when recording or playback is paused.  
TIMER LIGHT  
TIMER  
The TIMER light illuminates to show that the recorder's timer has  
been set to record a program automatically.  
EP LIGHT  
EP  
The EP light illuminates during recording or playback in the EP  
(Extended Play) mode.  
INFO BUTTON  
INFO  
The Info button displays information about a program or about the  
system, depending on what you are currently viewing.  
MENU  
Press the Menu button to open the Main Menu.  
MENU  
UP/DOWN/LEFT/RIGHT ARROW BUTTONS  
ᮡ
CH  
These buttons change the channel numbers move the highlight when in  
a menu or other screen.  
From a program, the Up/Down buttons change channels; the Left/Right  
buttons display other menus.  
ᮢ
CH  
SELECT BUTTON  
Press the Select button to select a highlighted menu option and  
SELECT  
perform that function.  
Page 2-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Parts of Your System  
The Recorder  
2
TV/VCR BUTTON  
TV/VCR  
Press the TV/VCR button to select the signal source that your TV  
receives. Choose TV position to watch TV or to watch one program  
while recording another. Choose VCR position to watch a tape, monitor  
a recording, or watch a satellite or local TV broadcast being received  
by the recorder.  
EJECT BUTTON  
8
EJECT  
Press the EJECT button to eject a cassette from the cassette loading slot.  
REC BUTTON  
REC  
Press the REC (Record) button to start recording on a tape.  
q
REW BUTTON  
REW  
Press the REW (Rewind) button to rewind the tape at high speed.  
Also, during playback of a VHS recording, press this button to view  
the picture in rapid reverse visual search.  
2
FF BUTTON  
FF  
Press the FF (Fast Forward) button to move the tape forward at high  
speed. Also, during playback of a VHS recording, press this button to  
view the picture in rapid forward visual search.  
3
PAUSE BUTTON  
Press the PAUSE button once to temporarily stop the tape during  
recording. During playback, press this button to freeze the playback  
picture, and press again to advance the picture by one frame.  
PAUSE  
6
STOP BUTTON  
Press the STOP button to stop the tape.  
STOP  
5
PLAY BUTTON  
Press the PLAY button to play a tape.  
PLAY  
AUXILIARY PHONO (RCA) AUDIO/VIDEO INPUT  
VIDEO (MONO)L–AUDIO–R  
Connect other auxiliary equipment (such as a DVD or laserdisc  
player) to this phono (RCA) input to get the best available audio and  
video. Tune to channel 000 to view sources connected to this input.  
Page 2-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User and  
Installation Guide  
THE RECORDER BACK PANEL  
AC`IN  
1
2
ANT. IN  
DC OUT 5V  
HIGH SPEED DATA PORT  
OUT  
13/18V}400mA  
R
L
PHONE JACK  
ACCESSORY AC-3 SATELLITE  
S-VIDEO  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
VHF/UHF  
ANT. IN  
UHF  
REMOTE  
ANTENA  
RF OUT  
CH3  
CH4  
The back panel of the recorder provides the connectors that you use to wire the recorder to  
all the other components and equipment that you may use.  
Depending on the installation setup that you use, you may not use some of these  
connectors, but they are provided to support any desired setup.  
Tighten the back panel coaxial cable connections only by hand. Using a  
wrench may over-tighten the connections, causing damage. Such damage is  
not covered by the Limited Warranty.  
SATELLITE ANT. IN  
ANT. IN  
Connect the coaxial cable from the satellite antenna to the recorder using  
this connection.  
13/18V}400mA  
SATELLITE  
VHF/UHF ANT. IN (RF OR VHF CONNECTION)  
VHF/UHF  
Connect your broadcast TV antenna or cable TV connection here.  
ANT. IN  
ACCESSORY JACK  
DC OUT 5V  
The Accessory Jack is reserved for future use.  
ACCESSORY  
Page 2-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Parts of Your System  
The Recorder  
2
RF OUT (RF OR VHF CONNECTION)  
RF OUT  
The recorder sends non-stereo output through this connector. If you are  
connecting cable TV or a broadcast TV antenna to the recorder, use this  
connection to connect to the TV for good picture and good non-stereo  
sound. Use the TV Phono (RCA) Audio/Video Output or the S-VIDEO  
Output to support the highest quality stereo sound and video for your  
satellite channels. See RF or VHF Connections (Good Picture and  
Sound) on page 7-19 for more information.  
PHONO (RCA) AUDIO/VIDEO OUTPUTS  
Connect one set of these phono (RCA) connections to a second VCR  
for editing and connect one set of these phono (RCA) connections to  
your TV to obtain the best available audio and video from your  
recorder.  
1
2
OUT  
R
L
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
S-VIDEO OUTPUT  
The recorder supports S-VIDEO, which provides the highest quality  
video available. If you use this connector, you still need to connect the  
audio using the phono (RCA) audio outputs.  
S-VIDEO  
UHF REMOTE ANTENNA  
The recorder uses the UHF antenna to receive commands from  
the remote.  
Note: Place the antenna vertically for maximum remote range.  
If necessary for space you can place the antenna horizontally,  
but this may reduce the range.  
UHF  
REMOTE  
ANTENA  
Make sure that the UHF antenna is not touching any metal surface  
or objects.  
CHANNEL 3/4 SWITCH  
CH3  
CH4  
If you use the RF OUT connection to wire the recorder to your  
television, you will need to move this switch to the channel to which  
the recorder will send the programming signal. Select a channel that  
is not being used by a cable or local television station.  
Note: It is not possible to operate the CHANNEL 3/4 switch through the  
menu screen. Use the CHANNEL 3/4 switch located on the back panel of  
this unit.  
Page 2-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User and  
Installation Guide  
AC-3 (DOLBY DIGITAL OUTPUT)  
By connecting this output terminal to an external decoder, you can enjoy  
Dolby Digital (AC-3) 5.1-channel surround sound when viewing  
appropriately encoded satellite broadcasts or recorded tapes.  
AC-3  
ࡗ
 Dolby, Dolby Digital, AC-3, Dolby Pro Logic are registered trademarks or Dolby  
Laboratories Licensing Corporation.  
HIGH SPEED DATA PORT  
HIGH SPEED DATA PORT  
There is a high speed data port under the cover plate.  
This port is reserved for use with new technologies,  
such as high speed data networks, as they become  
available.  
Do not remove the plate covering the High Speed Data Port until you need to  
use the port. Damage to an exposed port is not covered by the Limited  
Warranty.  
TELEPHONE JACK  
Connect a telephone line with a standard RJ-11 telephone connector to  
the recorder here, and then connect the line to an active telephone  
connection.  
PHONE JACK  
Your recorder must be connected to a telephone line at all times to order pay  
per view programs.  
Page 2-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Parts of Your System  
The Remote Control  
2
THE REMOTE CONTROL  
This section describes the features of your remote  
control. For details on using the remote, turn to  
Using the Remote Control on page 3-1.  
SAT TV D-VHS AUX  
POWER  
TV/VCR  
MUTE  
The remote control lets you access all the features of  
your system, including changing channels, using the  
menu system and operating the built-in VCR.  
MODE  
MENU  
You can program your remote to control your TV,  
audio amplifier, and other equipment.  
See Programming the Remote Control on page 4–39  
for this procedure.  
B
T
R
H
O
W
S
E
M
E
SELECT  
E
VIEW  
™INDEX  
INDEX£  
1
2
3
SKIP AUTO TRACK SKIP  
4
5
8
0
6
REW/BROWSE  
FF/BROWSE  
7
9
RECALL  
ADDRESS  
COUNTER RESET  
REC  
Page 2-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User and  
Installation Guide  
ABOUT THE UHF REMOTE CONTROL  
The UHF remote sends ultra-high frequency radio signals to a UHF antenna that is  
connected to the back of the recorder. Because UHF signals travel through solid objects,  
you can use the remote to control the recorder from another room, or even from another  
floor in the building. The remote uses IR(Infrared) signals to control certain other equip-  
ment (see explanation below).  
UHF REMOTE ADDRESS  
Because the UHF remote operates from such a long range, there may be conflicts if there are  
other recorders in the vicinity, also operated by UHF remote controls.  
To handle this problem, you can set up the remote so that it sends a unique "address"  
whenever it sends a signal to the recorder. You set up the recorder so that it looks for that  
address when it receives a signal, and ignores any signals that do not have that address. If  
you do this, the recorder recognizes signals only from the correct remote. You may choose  
from 15 different addresses.  
You can also install an attenuator at the UHF Remote Antenna connection on the recorder  
back panel. This reduces the sensitivity of the recorder to UHF signals, so it responds only  
to signals from your remote.  
For instructions on these procedures, see Setting the Remote Address on page 3-2.  
For instructions on installing an attenuator, see Reducing UHF Remote Control Range on  
page 4-41.  
You may have to reset the address whenever you change the batteries in the  
remote.  
IR CONTROL OF OTHER COMPONENTS  
The IR remote uses infrared light to control the TV, audio components, and other compatible  
equipment, instead of UHF radio signals.  
You must point the remote directly at the component, with no solid objects in the way.  
Page 2-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Parts of Your System  
The Remote Control  
2
REMOTE BUTTONS  
TV/VCR BUTTON  
TV/VCR  
Depending on how you wire your system together, the TV/VCR button  
does the following:  
ࡗ
 In SAT (Satellite) mode, the TV/VCR button switches the TV  
connected to the RF or VHF output between satellite TV and  
broadcast or cable TV. However, the Local TV Link feature is an  
easier way to view both satellite programming and local broadcast  
programming (see Local TV Link on page 3-13 for information).  
ࡗ
 In D-VHS mode, the TV/VCR button acts the same as when in the  
SAT mode.  
ࡗ
 In TV mode, the TV/VCR button switches among the inputs  
available on your TV.  
ࡗ
 The TV/VCR button can be used when controlling a receiver or  
second VCR.  
Note: The remote does not support this function for all TV's and VCR's.  
POWER BUTTON  
POWER  
Press the Power button to turn the recorder ON or OFF. The power light  
on the recorder illuminates to indicate the recorder is ON.  
MODE BUTTON  
You can use the Mode button to set the remote to control the recorder, its  
built-in satellite tuner and other various electronic components, such as  
TVs, VCRs, Stereo Amplifiers and Cable Boxes.  
MODE  
If you press the Mode button once, a mode light flashes rapidly to  
indicate which mode the remote is using. Press the Mode button again  
to change the mode to the next mode setting. See Programming the  
Remote Control on page 4-39 for the procedure to program the remote  
to control your TV, the built-inVCR, and other equipment.  
The modes are as follows:  
ࡗ
 In SAT (Satellite) mode the remote controls the built-in  
satellite receiver. Some VCR functions are also  
controllable.  
SAT TV D-VHS AUX  
POWER  
ࡗ
 In TV mode the remote controls the TV.  
TV/VCR  
ࡗ
 In D-VHS mode the remote controls the  
built-inVCR. The buttons that can be used in the  
D-VHS mode are labeled in green on the remote  
control. Some tuner functions are also controllable.  
ࡗ
 In AUX (Auxiliary) mode the remote controls another  
electronic device. This can be a stereo amplifier,  
second TV or a second VCR.  
Page 2-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User and  
Installation Guide  
MUTE BUTTON  
Press the Mute button to temporarily activate the mute function on your  
TV. Press the Mute button again to restore the sound.  
MUTE  
Note: This button works only if you have programmed the remote to  
control a TV or a stereo amplifier. The Mute button changes the volume  
at the corresponding electronic component, not at the recorder.  
MENU BUTTON  
Press the Menu button to open the Main Menu.  
MENU  
VOLUME BUTTON  
Press the (+) side of the Volume button to increase the sound volume.  
Press the (–) side of the Volume button to reduce the sound volume.  
Note: This button works only if you have programmed the remote to  
control the TV or a stereo amplifier. The Volume button changes the  
volume at that TV or amplifier.  
GUIDE BUTTON  
Press the Guide button to open the Program Guide.  
UP/DOWN/LEFT/RIGHT ARROW BUTTONS  
You can use the arrow buttons for several purposes:  
ࡗ
 When you are using a menu, press the Up, Down, Left, or  
Right arrow button to move the highlight to the desired option.  
ࡗ
 When viewing a program or playing a digital (D-VHS) recording,  
press the Right arrow button to open the Browse Banner.  
W
ࡗ
 When viewing a program, press the Left arrow button to open the  
Theme Categories menu.  
E
Page 2-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Parts of Your System  
The Remote Control  
2
ࡗ
 When viewing a program, press the Up or Down arrow button to  
change channels.  
ࡗ
 When you have the Browse Banner open, press the Up or Down  
arrow button to view the Browse Banner for the next channel. (Not  
available during playback)  
ࡗ
 When a menu offers you a list of choices, press the Up or Down  
arrow button to bring more choices into view.  
ࡗ
 When you have the Program Guide open, press the Up or Down  
arrow button to move the highlight through the channels.  
ࡗ
 When you must enter a number for a menu option, press the Up or  
Down arrow button to increase or decrease the number where you  
have placed the highlight.  
When you have the Browse Banner or Program Guide open, press the  
Left or Right arrow button to display programs in different time periods.  
Note: You cannot display a time period earlier than the present.  
SELECT BUTTON  
Press the Select button to select the highlighted option in a menu or  
screen and perform the function.  
SELECT  
INFO BUTTON  
You can use the Info button several ways.  
ࡗ
 Press the Info button for information about a program when:  
Ⅲ
Ⅲ
You have the Program Guide or a Browse Banner open,  
You have highlighted the program while selecting programs  
using a Theme Categories menu, or  
Ⅲ
Ⅲ
You are viewing the program.  
You are palying back a bit stream (D-VHS) recording of the  
program.  
ࡗ
 When you have a menu open that contains a Help option, press the  
Info button to see the help information for that menu.  
ࡗ
 When you have the recorder powered OFF, press the Info button to  
display system information, including the recorder address and the  
Smart Card number. You may need to provide this information if  
you call the Service Center.  
VIEW BUTTON  
Press the View button to return to viewing your program. If you are  
already watching your program, press the View button to briefly display  
the Program Banner. If you are using the menus, press View to cancel  
the procedure and exit completely back to your program.  
VIEW  
Page 2-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User and  
Installation Guide  
CANCEL BUTTON  
Press the Cancel button to cancel the current procedure and to return to  
the previous menu or to viewing your program.  
NUMBER PAD BUTTONS  
You can use the number pad buttons for several purposes:  
ࡗ
 When viewing a program or when the Program Guide is  
open, enter the 3-digit channel number and press the Select  
button to change immediately to that channel.  
ࡗ
 Use these buttons to enter menu option numbers.  
ࡗ
 If you are using a menu that requests some number such as  
a ZIP code or a password, press the buttons on the number  
pad to enter that information.  
ࡗ
 When you have the Program Guide open, enter the  
number of hours, and then press the Left or Right arrow  
button to display programs in the time period offset by the  
designated number of hours. Note: You cannot display a  
time period earlier than the present.  
™INDEX  
INDEX£  
1
2
3
SKIP AUTO TRACK SKIP  
4
REW/BROWSE  
7
5
8
0
6
FF/BROWSE  
9
INDEX BUTTONS  
Press the Index buttons to use the built-in VCR's Index Search function.  
See Index Search on page 5–8.  
SKIP BUTTONS  
Press the Skip buttons to use the built-in VCR's Skip Search function.  
See Skip Search on page 5–7.  
AUTO TRACK BUTTON  
Press the Auto Track button to turn the built-in VCR's automatic tracking  
function on or off. To adjust tracking manually, see Manual Tracking  
on page 5–10.  
REW/BROWSE AND FF/BROWSE BUTTONS  
Press the REW/Browse or FF/Browse button to use the built-in VCR's  
REW/Browse and FF/Browse functions. See REW/Browse and FF/Browse  
on page 5–6.  
ADDRESS BUTTON  
Use the Address button to program the remote to control your TV, or  
auxiliary device such as a second TV or VCR. You can also use the  
Address button to set the remote address. See Programming the Remote  
Control on page 4-39.  
ADDRESS  
Page 2-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Parts of Your System  
The Remote Control  
2
RECALL BUTTON/COUNTER RESET BUTTON  
With the remote in the SAT mode, press the Recall button to go back to  
the last channel you were watching. Press repeatedly to alternate  
between the last two channels that you viewed.With the remote in the  
D-VHS mode, and if there is a tape loaded in the recorder, press the  
Counter Reset button to change the current tape counter reading to  
"0:00:00".  
RECALL  
COUNTER RESET  
REC(ORD) BUTTON  
Press the Rec button to start recording a program. The D-VHS mode is  
automatically activated if a satellite channel is selected and a D-VHS  
cassette loaded in the VCR. This button is also used to activate the ITR  
(Instant Timer Recording) function. See Instant Timer Recording  
on page 5-19. You can also use the Rec button to match the recorder and  
remote addresses. See Setting the Remote Address on page 3-2.  
REC  
FAST FORWARD BUTTON  
With the remote in D-VHS mode, press the Fast Forward button to rapidly  
advance the tape. During playback of an analog (VHS) recording, press this  
button to rapidly view the video as a forward visual search. In SAT mode,  
press this button to page up through the Program Guide or a Themes list.  
REWIND BUTTON  
With the remote in D-VHS mode, press the Rewind button to rewind the tape.  
During playback of an analog (VHS) recording, press this button to rapidly  
view the video as a reverse visual search. In SAT mode, press this button to  
page down through the Program Guide or a Themes list.  
PAUSE BUTTON  
With the remote in D-VHS mode, press the Pause button to temporarily stop  
the tape during recording or play. Press the Play button to restart the tape.  
PLAY BUTTON  
With the remote in D-VHS mode, press the Play button to play the video tape.  
STOP BUTTON  
With the remote in D-VHS mode, press the Stop button to stop the video tape.  
Page 2-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User and  
Installation Guide  
THE SATELLITE ANTENNA  
The satellite antenna collects the signals transmitted from  
the satellites. A coaxial cable (or cables) carries these  
signals to the receiver (or receivers), where they are  
decoded and processed so you can view television  
programming. In this Guide, "satellite antenna" means the  
"dish," as well as the "dish" mounting hardware, including  
the "mast assembly," the "support arm," and the "LNBF."  
See Components of the Satellite Antenna on page 6-4.  
PROVIDED ACCESSORIES  
SAT TV D-VHS AUX  
POWER  
TV/VCR  
MODE  
MUTE  
MENU  
B
T
R
H
E
SELECT  
W
S
E
E
VIEW  
2
™INDEX  
INDEX£  
1
3
SKIP AUTO TRACK SKIP  
4
5
8
0
6
REW/BROWSE  
FF/BROWSE  
7
9
RECALL  
ADDRESS  
COUNTER RESET  
REC  
RF cable (F-type)  
Remote control unit  
"AAA" battery x 4  
Power cord  
S-Video cable  
(4-pin)  
Audio/Video cable  
Smart card  
(pre-installed in recorder)  
Telephone cord  
UHF antenna  
Page 2-14  
D-VHS tape  
(DF-180)  
Antenna Kit  
(HM-DSR100DU only)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting Started  
3
USING THE REMOTE CONTROL  
INSTALLING BATTERIES IN THE REMOTE  
The remote control is shipped with four AAA batteries, packaged separately.  
When you replace old batteries, you should replace all four batteries. Use four  
batteries of the same grade, for example, alkaline or carbon zinc, and do not  
mix batteries of different grades. Alkaline batteries provide longer battery life.  
Any time you remove or install the batteries, you may have to reprogram the  
remote for the TV and any other electronic components. See Programming the  
Remote Control on page 4-39 for the procedure to reprogram your remote.  
1. Press down on the slot in the battery case  
Battery Cover  
cover (on the back of the remote) and  
remove the cover.  
2. If you are replacing old batteries, remove  
and replace all four batteries.  
3. Insert the new batteries, making sure to  
match the plus (“+”) ends with the plus  
indicators on the remote. The batteries  
alternate plus and minus (“–”) ends when  
properly seated.  
Back of  
Remote  
Batteries  
4. Replace the cover by inserting the tabs  
into the slots, and snapping the cover into  
place.  
If the remote does not work after installing the batteries, confirm that the batteries are  
properly seated, with the plus and minus ends aligned correctly. You may need to reprogram  
the remote. See Programming the Remote Control on page 4-39.  
Page 3-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User and  
Installation Guide  
CHANGING MODES ON THE REMOTE  
Use the Mode button to set the remote to control other electronic components, such as your  
TV. See Mode Button on page 2-9 for more information. To change modes, do the following:  
Press the Mode button on the remote  
repeatedly until the appropriate mode  
light flashes rapidly.  
MODE  
For example, to control the built-in  
satellite receiver, make sure the SAT  
light is flashing. Or for the D-VHS  
mode, which is used to control the  
built-in video recorder and local timer,  
the D-VHS light should be flashing.  
SAT TV D-VHS AUX  
POWER  
TV/VCR  
SETTING THE REMOTE ADDRESS  
If your recorder turns ON or OFF, or does anything else without you pressing any buttons, it  
may be responding to signals from another nearby remote control. To prevent undesired  
operation of your recorder by a neighbor’s remote, you can address your remote to the  
recorder. You may choose from 15 different addresses.  
Note: If your remote is addressed to the recorder, you may need to reprogram this address  
when you change the batteries in the remote.  
Remote Buttons  
1. Make sure that fresh batteries are installed in  
the remote.  
2. Press the Mode button until the remote is in SAT  
mode. The SAT mode light flashes rapidly to  
indicate the mode.  
MODE  
3. Press the Address button once. The SAT mode  
ADDRESS  
light continues to flash, but at a slower rate.  
4. Enter a number from 1 to 15 using the number pad  
buttons. The SAT mode light stops flashing and  
stays lit.  
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
Note: Do not put a zero before the number  
when entering this number.  
Page 3-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting Started  
Using the Remote Control  
3
ADDRESS  
5. Press the Address button to save the new address in  
the remote memory. If the address you entered is  
valid for your remote, the SAT mode light blinks  
three times.  
6. If the recorder is ON, turn it OFF using the  
recorder Power button.  
7. Wait for 15 seconds to allow the recorder  
to reset.  
8. Press the Info button on the recorder.  
This will display the Important System  
Information menu.  
Important System Information  
Model ID : IRR  
Receiver CA ID : R0016825089-94  
Smart Card CA ID : S0000278950-56  
DNASP002 Rev052  
Software Version : 205PBTAA-F  
Boot Strap Version : 100BBTAA  
Customer Service : 1-800-333-DISH (3474)  
Internet Address : http://www.dishnetwork.com  
Remote Address : 9  
Copyright © 1996, EchoStar Communications  
OK  
Corporation. All Rights Reserved.  
9. Press the Rec(ord) button on the remote.  
The remote address displayed on the Important  
System Information menu will change to indicate  
that the recorder address now matches the remote  
address.  
REC  
Page 3-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User and  
Installation Guide  
TURNING ON THE SYSTEM  
Remote  
Buttons  
Menu Options  
1. Turn ON the TV and any other installed  
equipment.  
2. Turn ON the recorder. The power light on the  
recorder front panel illuminates.  
POWER  
Note: The remote must be in SAT mode to  
use it to turn ON the recorder.  
CHANGING CHANNELS  
If the program you select to view is security locked, you must enter the system  
password to view it.  
Remote  
Menu Options  
Buttons  
Either: Press the Up or Down arrow  
button to change channels.  
All unpurchased channels are  
automatically skipped. You will see  
only the channels in the active  
Favorites List.  
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
or  
Enter the desired three-digit channel  
number using the number pad buttons.  
Note: When changing channels to a  
channel number that has fewer than  
three digits (for example channel  
number 2 or 10), you must enter zeros  
to make these channel numbers three  
digits (for example 002 or 010).  
Page 3-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting Started  
Canceling a Procedure  
3
CANCELING A PROCEDURE  
Sometimes, when you are trying to make changes via the menus, you may want to stop and  
start over. From any menu or screen, you can press the Cancel or View button repeatedly  
until you return to your program.  
If you do not do anything in a menu for several minutes, such as press a button or select an  
option, the menu automatically closes. This also discards any changes you made, and  
returns the recorder to the program you were viewing.  
If you want to cancel a procedure, you must press the Cancel or View button  
before you select the OK or Save option in the last step of the process.  
If selecting Cancel or View does not exit from the current screen, you must  
finish the current procedure by selecting one of the available menu options or  
choices.  
Remote  
Menu Options  
Buttons  
To cancel the procedure and return  
immediately to watching your program,  
VIEW  
press the View button, or  
To return to the previous menu, press  
the Cancel button or select the Cancel  
option. Note: In some functions, this  
will also return the recorder  
Cancel  
immediately to your program, or  
Wait a few minutes and the menu will  
automatically close, discarding any changes  
you have made.  
Page 3-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User and  
Installation Guide  
ABOUT MENUS AND OTHER MULTIPLE-CHOICE SCREENS  
We designed the menus to make programming your recorder and selecting services quick  
and easy. The recorder displays the menus on your TV screen (“on-screen”). You use  
menus to communicate with the recorder and use the recorder features, such as setting  
security locks, selecting a program, or defining a Favorites List. These features are  
discussed in Chapter 4 - Using the System.  
SYSTEM MENU STRUCTURE  
The following figure shows the general structure of the menus you will see as you use the  
system. As you can see, the Main Menu is the key to all other menus.  
Main Menu  
1 Program Guide  
5
6
7
8
Locks  
System Setup  
Timers  
2
3
4
Themes  
Mail  
VCR Setup  
Favorites  
0
Cancel  
Return from this menu  
Theme Categories  
System Setup Menu  
Parental and System Locks  
1
2
Movies  
Sports  
5
Education  
1 Installation  
2 Diagnostics  
3 New Features  
4 Purchase Info  
5 Preferences  
1 Ratings Locks  
4 Front Panel Lock  
5 Change Password  
6 Series/Specials  
2 Channel Locks  
3 Lock System  
3 News/Business  
4 Family/Children  
7
8
Music/Arts  
Religious  
0
Cancel  
0
Cancel  
0
Cancel  
Return from this menu  
Return from this menu  
Installation and Setup Menu  
User Preferences Menu  
1
2
3
Point Dish/Signal  
4
Telephone System  
Factory Defaults  
1
2
Alternate Audio  
3
4
5
Channel Order  
Add Local Chan.  
System Info  
5
Picture Size  
System Upgrades  
Caller ID  
0
Cancel  
0
Cancel  
Return from this menu  
Return from this menu  
Page 3-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting Started  
About Menus and Other Multiple-Choice Screens  
3  
DISPLAYING MENUS  
You can use either of two methods to open the menus.  
ࡗ
 Open the Main Menu, then open any of the other menus from the Main Menu,  
or  
ࡗ
 Press the appropriate button on the remote to immediately open the desired menu.  
MENU OPTIONS  
A typical menu option looks like this:  
OK  
or this:  
1 Program Guide  
First you must highlight the menu option, then you select it.  
HIGHLIGHTING A MENU OPTION  
When you highlight a menu option using the arrow buttons on your remote, that option will  
appear a little darker than the other options, and it will look “pushed in.”  
A typical highlighted menu option looks like this:  
OK  
or this:  
1 Program Guide  
Once you have highlighted a menu option, you can select it.  
SELECTING A MENU OPTION  
When you select a menu option, that menu function is immediately performed. You press  
the Select button once the menu option is highlighted.  
A SHORTCUT  
An easier way to select a menu option is just to display the menu, then, on the remote  
control, press the number of that menu option (for example, “1” in the example above).  
This performs the highlight and select functions all at once.  
Page 3-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User and  
Installation Guide  
MULTIPLE - CHOICE LISTS  
When you select a choice from a list, the recorder does not apply the change until you select  
the Save or OK option. If you do not want to save any changes, select the Cancel option to  
discard all changes made in the menu.  
There are two types of lists: single selection and multiple selection.  
Single-selection allows only one choice  
to be selected at one time. If you select  
another choice, the previous choice is  
deselected. The single-choice list uses a  
circle to identify the choice.  
Multiple selection allows multiple  
choices to be selected at one time. If you  
select another choice, the previous choices  
remain selected. The multiple-choice list  
uses squares to identify the choice.  
Channels  
Languages  
English  
Spanish  
French  
FOX - 247  
HBO-E - 300  
CNN - 206  
SHO-E - 310  
German  
Italian  
MAX-E - 320  
NBC - 241  
CBS - 243  
Japanese  
HIGHLIGHTING AND SELECTING A CHOICE IN A LIST  
Use the Up/Down arrow buttons on the remote to highlight the desired item in the list.  
The black arrows on the list indicate the direction(s) in which you can move the highlight.  
To select a choice in a list, highlight the choice and then press the Select button. Make sure  
you select the Save or OK option to save your selection. Select the Cancel option to  
discard your selection.  
Page 3-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting Started  
About Menus and Other Multiple-Choice Screens  
3
When you highlight a choice in a  
single-selection list, it typically appears  
as shown below:  
When you highlight a choice in a  
multiple-selection list, it typically appears  
as shown below:  
Channels  
Languages  
English  
Spanish  
French  
FOX - 247  
HBO-E - 300  
CNN - 206  
SHO-E - 310  
German  
Italian  
MAX-E - 320  
NBC - 241  
CBS - 243  
Japanese  
When you select a choice in a  
single-selection list, the choice is  
marked as shown below:  
When you select choices in a  
multiple-selection list, the choices are  
marked as shown below:  
Channels  
Languages  
English  
Spanish  
French  
FOX - 247  
HBO-E - 300  
CNN - 206  
SHO-E - 310  
German  
Italian  
MAX-E - 320  
NBC - 241  
CBS - 243  
Japanese  
Page 3-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User and  
Installation Guide  
THE MAIN MENU  
The Main Menu provides access to all the features available in the menus. To open the Main  
Menu, press the Menu button. The Main Menu looks like the following.  
Main Menu  
Name of Menu  
Opens Program  
Guide Screen  
Opens Parental and  
System Locks Menu  
1
2
3
4
Program Guide  
5
Locks  
System Setup  
Timers  
Opens Theme  
Categories Menu  
Opens System  
Setup Menu  
Themes  
Mail  
6
7
8
Opens Mail Menu  
Opens Timers Menu  
Favorites  
0
VCR Setup  
Opens VCR Setup  
Menu  
Opens Favorite  
Lists Menu  
Exit Viewed  
Program  
Cancel  
Return from this menu  
Description of  
Highlighted Option  
MENU  
Press the Menu button to open the Main Menu.  
THE SYSTEM SETUP MENU  
The System Setup Menu provides a number of functions that help you install, customize,  
and get information about your system. You can display the System Setup Menu by  
pressing the Menu button to display the Main Menu, then selecting the System Setup  
option. The System Setup Menu is similar to the following.  
System Setup Menu  
Displays New  
Features Sent by  
Service Center  
Opens Installtion  
Menu  
Opens System  
Dlagnostic Tests  
Menu  
1
2
Installation  
Diagnostics  
3
4
5
New Features  
Purchase Info  
Preferences  
Displays Most  
Recent Dish-On-  
Demand Purchases  
Opens Preferences  
Menu  
Exit to Viewed  
Program  
0
Cancel  
Return from this menu  
Each option on this menu displays another menu or screen. The following list describes  
how these options work:  
Page 3-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting Started  
The System Setup Menu  
3
1 INSTALLATION  
This option displays the Installation and Setup menu. You will use this menu most while  
you are initially setting up your system.  
ࡗ
 Use the Point Dish and Signal Strength menu to aim the satellite antenna.  
Transponder refers to the channel transponder numbers that this unit receives.  
Transponder numbers are automatically displayed.  
ZIP Code refers to the postal number code of the region where you live. Enter the ZIP  
Code with the number pad buttons in Step 6 of Finding the Direction and Elevation on  
page 6-10.  
ࡗ
 See system information on the Important System Information menu (see page 7-17).  
ࡗ
 Set up the recorder to work with the type of telephone system you have.  
ࡗ
 Discard all setup information and return the recorder to the factory defaults.  
ࡗ
 Add local or cable channels to the Program Guide.  
2 DIAGNOSTICS  
A set of diagnostic functions allow you to test your system. These functions are in the  
System Diagnostic Tests menu. You can perform these functions yourself to verify that  
your system is in working order; or a Service Center Representative may ask you to perform  
some of these functions.  
3 NEW FEATURES  
Occasionally the Service Center may send, via the satellite signal, a list of new features  
available to you. The New Features option displays these and allows you to purchase them,  
if desired.  
4 PURCHASE INFO  
This option displays a screen that shows your most recent pay per view purchases.  
5 PREFERENCES  
This option displays the User Preferences menu, which lets you do the following:  
Select an alternate language. For example, if a program is transmitted in both English and  
Spanish, you can choose which language you would prefer.  
Note: This changes only the audio portion of programs and only if it is provided in multiple  
languages. This does not change the menus displayed by the recorder.  
Page 3-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User and  
Installation Guide  
ࡗ
 Select Picture Size: You can choose the picture format if a program is transmitted in  
both standard (4x3) and wide-screen (16x9) formats. You can use the 16x9 format only  
if you have a wide-screen TV that supports the 16x9 format.  
ࡗ
 Decide how to order the channel numbers while you are displaying the Program Guide.  
You can display the channel numbers in ascending or descending order.  
ࡗ
 Set up the system upgrade authorization. You can either have system upgrades loaded  
automatically, or you can specify that you want to authorize each upgrade before it is  
loaded.  
ࡗ
 Set up your system to display caller identification: the name and telephone number of  
the caller for your incoming telephone calls.  
Note: Caller ID must be provided by your local telephone company.  
Page 3-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting Started  
Local TV Link  
3
LOCAL TV LINK  
The Local TV Link feature allows you to view your local broadcast or cable channels via  
your system. Once you get the channels set up, you can select and view those channels  
through the Program Guide, or the Browse Banner; that is, the same way as you would  
any of the satellite channels.  
The quality of the audio and video you receive on local broadcast channels  
depends on the distance and terrain (hilly or flat) between the broadcast station  
and where you live, and the placement and quality of the broadcast TV antenna  
you use. If you use cable channels, the audio and video quality of these  
channels depends on your cable provider. If you have any questions about  
these channels, please contact your service provider, not the Service Center!  
Due to variations in quality among broadcast and cable television providers,  
the recorder manufacturer cannot be held responsible for the quality of these  
services  
Note: The Program Guide automatically displays “prime time” program information for the  
ABC, CBS, and NBC networks. “Prime time” hours vary in different areas. The information  
may be inaccurate if regularly-scheduled programs are preempted or if other changes occur.  
This section explains how you can add your local channels (whether they are network  
channels or cable channels) yourself, assign the network affiliations, and then access them  
via the Program Guide and via other channel selection methods.  
YOUR BROADCAST TV ANTENNA  
If you do not have a broadcast TV antenna installed, and wish to do so, there are a number  
of options. You can receive a limited number of channels via a “rabbit ears” type antenna  
that sits on your TV set, or a much wider range via a large VHF/UHF indoor/outdoor an-  
tenna. Of course, the higher the quality of the broadcast TV antenna you use, the greater its  
range and the better your reception will be. Broadcast TV antennas are available from your  
local consumer electronics retailers.  
Make sure to follow the broadcast TV antenna installation instructions correctly. Make sure to  
ground the broadcast TV antenna properly!! The antenna cable plugs into the VHF/UHF Ant.  
In connection on the back panel of the recorder:  
If your TV has an available Phono (RCA) Audio/Video input connections, connect them to  
one of the recorder's Phono (RCA) Audio/Video outputs. This will provide stereo audio  
and a higher quality picture than the picture obtained when using the recorder's RF Out (RF  
or VHF Connection).  
Once you have attached your broadcast TV antenna or cable hook-up to this connection, you  
can set up your Local TV Link channels. The rest of this section explains how to do this.  
Page 3-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User and  
Installation Guide  
ADDING LOCAL OR CABLE CHANNELS  
To add local broadcast or cable channels, do the following:  
Remote  
Buttons  
Menu Options  
1. Press the Mode button until the remote  
MODE  
is in SAT mode.  
2. Press the Menu button to open the  
Main Menu.  
MENU  
3. Select the System Setup option.  
4. Select the Installation option.  
6
1
System Setup  
Installation  
6
1
2
5. Select the Add Local Channel option. If  
you are setting up your local channels for  
the first time or switching options in the  
Select Cable/Broadcast list, follow the  
steps in order. Otherwise, go to step 8 to  
add channels to the Selected Local  
Channels list.  
2 Add Local Chan.  
6. Press the Left arrow button to move the  
highlight into the Select Cable/  
Broadcast list.  
E
7. Press the Up or Down arrow button to  
highlight either the Broadcast Channels  
option or the appropriate Cable Channels  
option (Standard, HRC, or IRC)(Contact  
your cable TV provider for information on  
whether you have a standard, HRC or IRC  
cable system. Press the Select button to  
choose the channel option.  
Broadcast Channels  
Standard Cable Channels  
HRC Cable Channels  
IRC Cable Channels  
SELECT  
Note: You can add either cable (Standard, HRC, or IRC) or broadcast channels,  
not both. If you add one type of channel and then select another option, the Selected  
Local Channels list will not change. In that case, the channels in the list would not  
be correct for the option you selected. So, whenever you change the option, you  
should also edit the Selected Local Channels list.  
Page 3-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting Started  
Local TV Link  
3
8. Select the Choose option. Press the Right  
arrow and Up arrow button to highlight the  
Choose and press the Select button. This will  
display the Choose Local Channel screen.  
Choose  
9. Notice that the first time you display the  
Choose Local Channel screen, the only  
channel in the Selected Local Channels  
list is channel 000. This is the AUX INPUT  
channel, which is the input from the Auxiliary  
Phono (RCA) Audio/Video Input, usually  
attached to a VCR.  
Channels  
000  
002  
003  
004  
005  
006  
007  
008  
009  
Press the Left arrow button to move the  
highlight to the Channels list.  
10.Select the desired channel in the  
Channels list.  
Either: Use the Up or Down arrow button  
to highlight the desired channel number.  
or  
Use the number pad buttons to enter the  
channel number.  
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
Note: When entering a channel number  
that has fewer than three digits (for  
example, channel number 2 or 10), you  
must enter zeros to make these channel  
numbers three digits (for example, 002 or  
010).  
11.Press the Select button. This will display  
the Edit Local Channel Name screen.  
SELECT  
12.Either: Use this screen to enter the local  
call letters for the station, such as WXYZ,  
DISC, KYXO etc.).  
or  
If you do not want to enter a name, select the  
Save  
Save option and go to step 16.  
Page 3-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User and  
Installation Guide  
13.Press the Left arrow button to move the  
highlight to the keypad area.  
E
14.Use the arrow buttons to highlight a  
letter. Press Select. Repeat to spell  
out the name of the channel. You can  
enter up to five characters for the  
channel name.  
A B C D E  
F
G H  
I
J
S
1
K L M N O P Q R  
T
2
U
3
V W X  
Y
7
Z
8
0
9
4
5
6
space  
back  
If necessary, select the space option to  
insert a space in the channel name or the  
<back option to correct a letter.  
Note: You cannot use any channel name more  
than once. If you try to do this, the recorder  
will display an error message.  
15.Select the Save option. This will display  
the Select Network Affiliation screen.  
Save  
16.Press the Left arrow button to move the  
highlight into the Network Affiliation list.  
E
17.Use the Up and Down arrow buttons to  
highlight the network affiliation  
Chan: 002  
ABC  
CBS  
associated with the station you set up.  
NBC  
None  
18.Press Select.  
SELECT  
Page 3-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting Started  
Local TV Link  
3
19.Once you are finished, select the Save  
option. The recorder will display the  
Choose Local Channel screen. The  
channel that you have just added should  
now appear in the Selected Local  
Channels list.  
Save  
20.Repeat steps 10 through 19 until all desired  
channels are added.  
Once you are finished, select the Save option  
Save  
to save the list.  
DELETING A CHANNEL FROM THE SELECTED CHANNELS LIST  
To delete a local broadcast or cable channel from the Selected Local Channels list so it no  
longer appears in the Program Guide, do the following.  
Note: You cannot delete Ch 000, since it is reserved for input via the Auxiliary Phono  
(RCA) Audio/Video Input.  
Remote  
Menu Options  
Buttons  
1. Press the Mode button until the remote  
MODE  
MENU  
is in SAT mode.  
2. Press the Menu button to open the  
Main Menu.  
3. Select the System Setup option.  
4. Select the Installation option.  
6
1
System Setup  
Installation  
6
1
2
5. Select the Add Local Channel option.  
2 Add Local Chan.  
6. Select the Choose option. This will display  
the Choose Local Channel screen.  
Choose  
Page 3-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User and  
Installation Guide  
7. Press the Left arrow button twice to move  
the highlight to the Selected Local  
Channels list.  
E
Either: Use the Up or Down arrow  
button to highlight the channel you want  
to delete.  
Press Select. Repeat until all desired  
channels are deleted.  
SELECT  
Note: When the Selected Local  
Channels list is saved, the system will  
arrange the list to fill in blank spaces  
caused by deleting channels.  
or  
Select the Clear option to delete all channels  
from the Selected Local Channels list.  
Clear  
Note: If you select the Clear option, the  
recorder will display a warning message  
indicating that you will be erasing the local  
channels list completely. Select the Yes option  
to erase the local channels list or select the No  
option to keep the list.  
8. Select the Save option to save the new list.  
Save  
USING CH 000 IN THE CHANNELS LIST  
Ch 000 in the Channels list appears as the default channel name AUXIN in the Selected  
Local Channels list. Selecting Ch 000 in the Channels list lets you view the signal  
coming into the Auxiliary Phono (RCA) Audio/Video Input. Usually this signal will be  
from a connected VCR , DVD player, laserdisc player or other device, so that when you  
change to channel 000, you are viewing the tape or disc being played by the connected unit.  
Page 3-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting Started  
Local TV Link  
3
EDITING THE NAME OF A CHANNEL  
If you have entered the wrong channel name or want to add a channel name for a channel  
(except Ch 000) that is on the Selected Local Channels list, do the following:  
Remote  
Menu Options  
Buttons  
1. Press the Mode button until the remote  
MODE  
MENU  
is in SAT mode.  
2. Press the Menu button to open the  
Main Menu.  
3. Select the System Setup option.  
4. Select the Installation option.  
6
1
System Setup  
Installation  
6
1
2
5. Select the Add Local Channel option.  
2 Add Local Chan.  
6. Select the Choose option. This will display  
the Choose Local Channel screen.  
Choose  
7. Select the desired channel in the  
Channels list.  
Either: Press the Up or Down arrow  
button to move the highlight to the desired  
channel number in the Channels list.  
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
or  
On the remote control number pad,  
press the desired channel number. This  
will move the highlight to that channel  
number.  
8. Press the Select button. This will display  
the Edit Local Channel Name screen.  
Use this screen to enter the new channel  
name.  
SELECT  
Page 3-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User and  
Installation Guide  
9. Press the Left arrow button to move the  
highlight to the keypad area.  
E
10.Use the arrow buttons to highlight  
a letter. Press Select. Repeat to spell  
out the name of the channel.  
A B C D E  
F
G H  
I
J
S
1
K L M N O P Q R  
T
2
U
3
V W X  
Y
7
Z
8
0
9
4
5
6
space  
back  
If necessary, select the space option  
to insert a space in the channel name  
or the <back option to correct a letter.  
Note: You cannot duplicate the name  
of a channel. If you use any channel  
name more than once, the recorder will  
display an error message.  
11.Select the Save option. The recorder will  
display the Select Network Affiliation  
screen.  
Save  
If desired, you can change the network  
affiliation at this time. See step 16 in  
Adding Local or Cable Channels on page  
3-14.  
12.Select the Save option. The recorder will  
return to the Choose Local Channel screen.  
The new channel name will appear in the  
Selected Local Channels list.  
Save  
13.Select the Save option to save the new  
Save  
channel name.  
Page 3-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the System  
4
ABOUT THE PROGRAM BANNER  
The Program Banner is displayed for a few seconds at the top and bottom of the TV screen  
every time you change the channel, begin playback of a recording, or press the View button  
on the remote. The top Program Banner provides information about the program that you  
are viewing. The bottom Program Banner provides information about the status of your  
VCR. The figures below show the Program Banners for your satellite channels and your  
local broadcast or cable channels. The information varies, depending on the specific pro-  
gram, but may include any or all of the items in the following figures:  
PROGRAM BANNER FOR SATELLITE CHANNELS:  
Current Date  
Current Program Title  
Channel Number  
Tue 10/11  
10:13 am  
300  
HBO-E  
Current  
Time  
Raging Bull  
Channel  
Name  
Time Left: 1:02  
PG-13[V,L]  
List:MOM  
Remaining Time of  
Program  
Rating & Content  
Codes  
Active Favorites  
List (color-coded)  
PROGRAM BANNER FOR LOCAL BROADCAST TV OR CABLE TV CHANNELS:  
Current Date  
Channel Number  
Tue 10/11  
10:13 am  
9
Current  
Time  
Local Programming  
UPN  
Channel  
Name  
List:ALL CHAN  
Active Favorites List  
Page 4-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User and  
Installation Guide  
While recording a program, the Program Banner information is expanded to include more  
information, including a graphical tape position indicator.  
At the start of playback, the Program Banner provides information about the program  
being currently played, as well as the current playback status. Depending on the recorded  
program, the following information may be displayed.  
PROGRAM BANNER DURING RECORDING AND PLAYBACK:  
Thu 12/25  
12:00 am  
503  
4
5
6
1
2
3
101 Dalmatians  
PPV4  
Time Left: 0:36  
G
List:ALL CHAN  
7
16  
15  
8
9
Memory  
Play  
0:12:34  
Index:01  
Tape in  
AC3  
Position  
D-VHS  
Hi-Fi  
14  
10  
11  
12  
13  
10. Operation Mode  
1. Current Date/Time  
When the operation mode is changed, the  
new mode is displayed – RECORD  
(5 sec.), PLAY (5 sec.), FF/REW (5 sec.  
when engaged from stop mode), RECORD  
PAUSE (for as long as Pause is engaged),  
2. Remaining Time of Program  
Displayed when a satellite channel is  
received.  
3. Current Program Title  
4. Current Channel Number  
5. Current Channel Name  
6. Active Favorites List (color-coded)  
7. Rating & Content Codes  
8. Counter Reading  
and RECORD TIMER : (5 sec.).  
* * *  
11. Recording Mode  
12. Audio Mode Indicators  
13. AC3 Indication  
14. Tape Position Indicator  
15. Tape in indicator  
9. Counter Memory On/Off  
When a cassette is loaded, the message is  
displayed for 5 seconds.  
16 Index Indication  
Page 4-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the System  
About the Browse Banner  
4
ABOUT THE BROWSE BANNER  
You can use the Browse Banner to change channels; see what other programs are on  
without removing the current program from view; and, create an event timer.  
The Browse Banner information is displayed at the top and bottom of your TV screen and  
includes the items in the following pictures:  
BROWSE BANNER FOR SATELLITE CHANNELS:  
Current Date  
Current Program Title  
Current Channel Number  
300  
Tue 10/11  
10:13 am  
Raging Bull  
Current  
Time  
HBO-E  
Current  
Channel  
Name  
New  
Program  
Time  
New  
Channel  
Number  
New Program  
Date/Time  
322  
Tue10/11  
10:00 am  
Pulp Fiction  
MAX-W  
List:MOM  
New  
Channel  
Name  
NC-17[V,LN,SC]  
Time Left:1:47  
Time  
Remaining  
Active Favorites List  
(color-coded)  
Rating and Content Codes  
BROWSE BANNER FOR LOCAL BROADCAST TV OR CABLE TV CHANNELS:  
Current Date  
Current Program Title  
Current Channel Number  
9
Tue 10/11  
10:13 am  
Local Programming  
Current  
Time  
KNBC  
Current  
Channel  
Name  
New  
Channel  
Number  
20  
Tue10/11  
10:00 am  
New Program  
Date/Time  
Local Programming  
New  
Channel  
Name  
WGPR  
List:MOM  
Active Favorites List  
Page 4-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User and  
Installation Guide  
OPENING THE BROWSE BANNER  
To open the Browse Banner while you are viewing a program, press the Right arrow  
button.  
W
VIEWING BANNER INFORMATION FOR OTHER CHANNELS  
To view Browse Banner information about other channels, do the following:  
Remote  
Menu Options  
Buttons  
1. Press the Mode button until the remote is in  
MODE  
SAT mode.  
2. Press the Right arrow button to display the  
Browse Banner for the current program.  
W
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
3. Either: Enter the desired 3-digit channel  
number using the number pad buttons.  
Note: When changing channels to a  
channel number that has fewer than three  
digits (for example, channel number  
2 or 10), you must enter zeros to make  
these channel numbers three digits  
(for example, 002 or 010).  
or  
Press the Up or Down arrow button to  
display the desired channel in the  
bottom part of the Browse Banner.  
The Browse Banner displays only the  
channels in the active Favorites List.  
4. You can press the Info button for more  
information about the program listed in the  
Browse Banner.  
Page 4-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the System  
About the Browse Banner  
4
CHANGING CHANNELS VIA THE BROWSE BANNER  
If you are browsing and see a program that you would like to view, do the following to  
change to the new channel:  
Remote  
Menu Options  
Buttons  
1. Make sure the channel you want to view is  
displayed in the lower portion of the  
Browse Banner.  
2. Press the Select button to change to the new  
SELECT  
channel. The Browse Banner automatically  
closes.  
CLOSING THE BROWSE BANNER  
To close the Browse Banner, do the following:  
Press the Cancel button. Your recorder remains tuned to the channel you are viewing.  
Or you can wait a few minutes, and the Browse Banner automatically closes.  
Page 4-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User and  
Installation Guide  
ABOUT THE PROGRAM GUIDE  
The Program Guide provides a complete listing of the available channels and programs.  
Note: You must add your local broadcast or cable channels to the Program Guide yourself.  
See Local TV Link on page 3-13. However, the Program Guide automatically displays  
"prime time" program information for the major broadcast networks. "Prime time" hours  
vary in different areas. The information may be inaccurate if regularly-scheduled programs  
are preempted, or if other changes occur.  
You can use the Program Guide to change channels; see what programs are scheduled in  
the future; purchase pay per view programs; and, create an event timer.  
In the Program Guide, you may see some channel numbers with a red background — these  
are channels to which you have not subscribed. See Available Services on page 1–5 for  
more information about subscription channels and adding channels.  
The Program Guide may contain any or all of the items shown below:  
Current  
Currently Active  
Date and Time  
Favorites List (color-coded)  
Channel Number  
of Number of  
Hours to Skip  
LocksStatus  
of System  
Tue - 3/23  
8:30 pm  
Favorite List  
ALL CHAN  
TM  
142  
Day of the  
Programs in View  
Tue  
3/23  
8:30 pm  
9:00 pm  
9:30 pm  
Time of the  
Programs in View  
000  
AUXIN  
Auxiliary Input  
Auxiliary Input  
009  
KUSA  
Local Programming  
Local TV Link  
142  
ESPN2  
NBA PreGame  
Update  
NBA Playoffs  
Program List  
160  
MTV  
To Be  
Announced  
Ren & Stimpy  
Are You Afraid?  
172  
DISN  
Last of the Mohicans  
Bounty Tracker  
320  
MAX-E  
Best of Comic  
Relief  
The Lives of a Bengal Lancer  
Channel Number and Name  
Favorite List  
Each Favorites List name is shown in a different color.  
Indicates that this program began or will end in a time period that is  
not in view.  
Indicates that the current time period available is in view (you cannot  
display a time earlier than this).  
Page 4-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the System  
About the Program Guide  
4
Indicates that the last viewable time period is in view (you cannot  
display a time later than this).  
This display is normally blank with two arrows. When it is not blank, it  
shows:  
142  
The number of hours being entered on the remote control number pad.  
Press the Left or Right arrow button to skip the display forward or  
backward that number of hours.  
or  
The channel number of the channel being entered on the remote  
control number pad. To skip to the program listing for a channel,  
enter the channel number and press the Select button.  
Note: The Program Guide can display programs scheduled for a  
limited time beyond the present.  
OPENING THE PROGRAM GUIDE  
To open the Program Guide and view a listing of available channels and programs, do the  
following:  
Remote  
Menu Options  
Buttons  
1. Press the Mode button until the remote is in  
MODE  
SAT mode.  
2. Either: Press the Guide button.  
or  
MENU  
Press the Menu button to open the  
Main Menu. Then, select the Program  
Guide option.  
1
Program Guide  
1
Page 4-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User and  
Installation Guide  
SCANNING THROUGH CHANNELS  
You can scan through the available channels in the Program Guide to see what program-  
ming is available. To do this, do the following:  
Remote  
Menu Options  
Buttons  
Either: Enter the desired 3-digit channel  
number. Optional: Press the Select button.  
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
or  
Press the Up or Down arrow button to  
highlight the desired channel.  
or  
Press the Fast Forward button to page up,  
or the Rewind button to page down through  
the Program Guide.  
If desired, press the Info button for more  
information about the highlighted program.  
Press the Select button to change to the new  
program.  
SELECT  
Note: Only the channels on the active  
Favorites List are displayed.  
Page 4-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the System  
About the Program Guide  
4
CHANGING CHANNELS VIA THE PROGRAM GUIDE  
To change to a new channel using the Program Guide, do the following:  
Remote  
Buttons  
Menu Options  
1. Press the Mode button until the remote is in  
MODE  
SAT mode.  
2. Press the Guide button to open the Program  
Guide.  
3. Either: Enter the desired 3-digit channel  
number using the number pad buttons.  
Then, press Select to change to the new  
program.  
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
Note: When changing channels to a  
channel number that has fewer than three  
digits (for example, channel number  
2 or 10), you must enter zeros to make  
these channel numbers three digits  
(for example, 002 or 010).  
SELECT  
or  
Press the Up or Down arrow button to  
highlight the desired channel. Then, press  
Select to change to the new program.  
Note: Only the channels in the active  
Favorites List are displayed.  
SELECT  
If you select a program that has not started yet, the recorder displays the  
Create an Event Timer menu. See Viewing Information About Programs  
on page 4-10 and Event Timers on page 5-22 for more information.  
Page 4-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User and  
Installation Guide  
VIEWING INFORMATION ABOUT PROGRAMS  
If you want more information about a program listed in the Program Guide, do the following:  
Remote  
Menu Options  
Buttons  
1. Press the Mode button until the remote is in  
MODE  
SAT mode.  
2. Press the Guide button to open the Program  
Guide.  
3. Highlight the desired program using the  
arrow buttons on the remote control.  
4. Press the Info button. This displays the  
information screen, which shows start and  
end times, channel, and other information  
about the program.  
5. Press the Cancel button to return to the  
Program Guide.  
CLOSING THE PROGRAM GUIDE  
To close the Program Guide, do the following:  
Press the Cancel button. The recorder returns to the channel you were viewing before you  
opened the Program Guide.  
Page 4-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the System  
About Themes  
4
ABOUT THEMES  
The system allows you to list and select programs according to the theme of their contents.  
For example, you can list just movies or just sports. You can then quickly list programs  
based on that theme, and select the program you want without having to search through all  
the channels. The themes list only displays programs that are available for the current date.  
DISPLAYING PROGRAMS BY THEME  
Remote  
Menu Options  
Buttons  
1. Either: While viewing a program, press the  
Left arrow button.  
E
or  
Press the Menu button to open the Main  
Menu. Then, select the Themes option.  
MENU  
2
Themes  
2
2. The recorder displays the Theme Categories  
menu, which lists the available themes.  
3. Select the theme you want. This displays the  
list of events with that theme. For example, if  
you select the Movies theme, you will see a list  
of upcoming movies, as shown here. Programs  
on channels to which you have not subscribed  
are shown with a red background.  
1
Movies  
Sat 3/22  
6:48 pm  
Movies  
Available Events  
Cancel  
LIFE 3/22 7:00p The Return of the Brady...  
HBO 3/22 8:50p City Slickers  
HBO2 3/22 8:55p Animal House  
SHOW 3/22 9:00p The Unbearable Lightness...  
TMC 3/22 9:00p Bullets Over Broadway  
Page  
Up  
AMC 3/22 10:00p Dr. Cyclops  
CMAX 3/22 10:30p Clear And Present Danger  
TNT  
TBS  
3/22 10:30p Return of the Jedi  
3/22 11:00p Back to the Future  
Page  
Down  
Page 4-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User and  
Installation Guide  
SELECTING A PROGRAM IN THE THEMES LIST  
You can change to a program in the Themes list by doing the following:  
Remote  
Buttons  
Menu Options  
1. Press the Mode button until the remote is in  
MODE  
SAT mode.  
2. Use the Page Up and Page Down options  
(or the Fast Forward and Rewind buttons)  
to speed your search for the desired program.  
Page  
Up  
Page  
Down  
3. Press the Left arrow button to move the  
highlight to the program list.  
E
4. Press the Up or Down arrow button to  
highlight the desired program.  
5. Press the Select button to view the program  
SELECT  
or press Cancel to close the Themes list  
without selecting a program.  
Page 4-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the System  
Ordering Pay Per View Programs  
4
ORDERING PAY PER VIEW PROGRAMS  
A pay per view program is a program that you order and pay a small fee to view once.  
There are many types of programs available through the pay per view service, such as  
movies, sports, comedies, and musicals. You can find out what pay per view programs are  
available by viewing the Program Guide information starting at channel 500 (see About  
the Program Guide on page 4-6). To preview upcoming pay per view programs, view the  
Preview Channel. See Available Services on page 1-5 for more information about pay per  
view programs. To purchase and view a pay per view program, do the following:  
Your recorder must be connected to an active telephone line at all times, in  
order to purchase pay per view programs using the recorder.  
Remote  
Menu Options  
Buttons  
1. Select the desired pay per view program  
using the Program Guide.  
2. If the system is locked, enter the system  
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
*
*
*
*
password using the number pad buttons.  
OK  
Yes  
Select the OK option to accept the  
password.  
3. Either: Purchase the pay per view event  
by selecting the Yes option. The recorder  
displays a confirmation screen.  
(see step 4).  
or  
If you do not want to purchase the pay per  
view program, press the Up or Down  
arrow button (if you are viewing a  
program) or select the No option or the  
Cancel option. If you do this, you can  
stop here.  
No  
Cancel  
Page 4-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User and  
Installation Guide  
4. At the Confirmation Screen:  
Either: Select the Yes option again to confirm  
the purchase. The fee will appear on your  
invoice.  
Yes  
or  
Select the No option or the Cancel option to  
cancel the purchase.  
Note: You cannot cancel previously ordered  
pay per view programs using this procedure.  
No  
Cancel  
To order through the Service Center:  
Call the Service Center to order the pay per view program. The pay per view fee is  
added to your next invoice. This method may add an additional service fee to the pay  
per view fee.  
LOCKING PAY PER VIEW PROGRAMS  
You can lock your system so that only users who know the password can order pay per  
view programs. See Locking the System on page 4-25 for details.  
FAVORITES LISTS  
ABOUT FAVORITES LISTS  
Favorites Lists are lists of your favorite channels that you create and change (adding or  
deleting channels) as you wish. When you make a Favorites List active, the recorder  
displays only the channels in that list.  
ࡗ
 You can still view a channel not on the list by entering the 3-digit channel number using  
the remote number pad buttons, or by selecting a program on that channel using the  
Theme Categories menu.  
ࡗ
 There is also a Favorites List called "ALL CHAN," which contains all the channels.  
You cannot make any changes to this list. If you want all channels in view, make sure  
that the "ALL CHAN" Favorites List is active.  
You can define up to four different Favorites Lists, each with a maximum of 30 channels.  
Each Favorites List is indicated by a unique color in the Program Banner, the Browse  
Banner, and the Program Guide.  
When you receive your system, these four lists are named "LIST 1," "LIST 2," "LIST 3,"  
and "LIST 4." They are empty until you add channels to them.  
Page 4-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the System  
Favorites Lists  
4
CREATING OR MODIFYING A FAVORITES LIST  
You can add channels to, and remove channels from a Favorites List.  
Remote  
Buttons  
Menu Options  
1. Press the Mode button until the remote is in  
MODE  
SAT mode.  
2. Press the Menu button to open the  
Main Menu.  
MENU  
3. Select the Favorites option.  
4
Favorites  
4
4. Select the Favorites List to be changed. This  
example shows the list names that come with  
your system. Note that you cannot modify the  
"ALL CHAN" list in any way.  
Selected List  
ALL CHAN  
LIST 1  
LIST 2  
LIST 3  
LIST 4  
5. Select the Modify List option. This displays  
Modify List  
the channels in the Favorites List.  
LIST 2  
CBS  
FOX  
HBO  
DISC  
SHO - E  
MAX2  
MTV  
FOX  
AMC  
ABC  
NBC  
6. At any time you can select the Clear option to  
immediately remove all channels from the  
current list.  
Clear  
Page 4-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User and  
Installation Guide  
7. In the Channels list, highlight the  
channel you want to add to your Favorites  
List.  
Channels  
CNN - 200  
DISC - 182  
FAM - 180  
TLC - 178  
Either: Use the Up or Down arrow button  
to bring the desired channel into view.  
TOON - 176  
DISNE - 172  
NICK - 170  
TNN - 168  
CMT - 162  
or  
Use the number pad buttons to enter the  
channel number.  
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
Note: When entering a channel number  
that has fewer than three digits (for  
example, channel number 2 or 10), you  
must enter zeros to make these channel  
numbers three digits (for example,  
002 or 010).  
SELECT  
Press the Select button.  
8. Repeat step 7 until all desired channels are  
added.  
9. To delete a channel from your Favorites List,  
LIST 2  
CBS  
SELECT  
highlight the channel in the Favorites List .  
FOX  
HBO  
DISC  
SHO - E  
MAX2  
MTV  
Press the Select button.  
FOX  
AMC  
ABC  
10.Repeat step 9 until all desired channels are  
deleted.  
NBC  
11.Select the Save option to save all changes  
Save  
to the Favorites List or press Cancel to discard  
the changes.  
Page 4-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the System  
Favorites Lists  
4
CHANGING THE NAME OF A FAVORITES LIST  
Since the lists are initially named "LIST 1," LIST 2," etc., you may want to give them more  
meaningful names. "MOM," "DAD," or "MYFAV" are all possible Favorites Lists names.  
Remote  
Menu Options  
Buttons  
1. Press the Mode button until the remote is in  
MODE  
MENU  
SAT mode.  
2. Press the Menu button to open the  
Main Menu.  
3. Select the Favorites option.  
4
Favorites  
4
4. Select the Favorites List to be changed.  
Selected List  
ALL CHAN  
LIST 1  
LIST 2  
LIST 3  
LIST 4  
5. Select the Edit List Name option.  
Edit List Name  
Clear  
6. At any time, you can select the Clear option  
to immediately remove all characters from  
the name.  
7. Use the arrow buttons to highlight a letter.  
Press Select. Repeat to spell out the  
desired name.  
If necessary, select the space option to  
insert a space in the channel name or the  
< back option to correct a letter. You can  
enter up to eight characters, including  
spaces.  
8. Select the Save option to save all changes.  
Save  
Page 4-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User and  
Installation Guide  
MAKING A FAVORITES LIST ACTIVE  
When a Favorites List is active, the recorder displays only the channels in that  
list. However, you can still view a channel not on the list by entering the 3-  
digit channel number using the remote number pad buttons, or by selecting  
a program on that channel using the Theme Categories menu.  
Note: When changing channels to a channel number that has fewer than three  
digits (for example, channel number 2 or 10), you must enter zeros to make  
these channel numbers three digits (002 or 010).  
Remote  
Menu Options  
Buttons  
1. Press the Mode button until the remote is in  
MODE  
SAT mode.  
2. Either: If the Program Guide is open, press  
the Guide button to select the next Favorites  
List. Press Guide repeatedly to scan through  
all available lists.  
or  
MENU  
Press the Menu button to open the  
Main Menu.  
3. Select the Favorites option.  
4
Favorites  
4
4. Highlight the desired Favorites List  
(example lists are shown here).  
Selected List  
ALL CHAN  
DAD  
MOM  
SIS  
LIL BRO  
5. Select the Save option to make the highlighted  
Save  
Favorites List active.  
Note: If you try to make an empty Favorites  
List active, the recorder highlights the Modify  
List option. You must add at least one channel  
to this Favorites List before you select it.  
Page 4-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the System  
Security Features  
4
SECURITY FEATURES  
ABOUT SECURITY FEATURES  
Security features let you make sure your system is being used the way you want it to be  
used.  
You can use two levels of security:  
ࡗ
 You can lock your system, so that only those who know the password can access locked  
features (see below).  
ࡗ
 You can set up a Personal Identification Number (PIN) at the Service Center to keep  
unauthorized users from calling and ordering services (see Service Center Security on  
page 4-29).  
PARENTAL AND SYSTEM LOCKS  
You can set system locks to keep anyone who does not know the password from:  
ࡗ
 Viewing one or more specified channels.  
ࡗ
 Viewing programs with certain rating or extended rating (content) codes.  
ࡗ
 Purchasing additional cost services such as pay per view programs.  
ࡗ
 Using the recorder front panel buttons.  
To set locks, you must do the following:  
1. Create the channel or program locks (you do not need to do this if you wish to lock only pay  
per view services).  
2. Lock the recorder front panel buttons, if you wish.  
3. Lock the system. This puts the locks you have created into effect, and also automatically  
locks the purchase of additional cost services.  
Once the system is locked, anyone who wants to access the locked services must enter the  
password.  
First you set the locks; then you lock the system.  
You must lock your system in order to put all locks into effect.  
If you want to lock only pay per view services, you do not need to create any  
special locks. Just lock the system, and this automatically locks pay per  
view services.  
Page 4-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User and  
Installation Guide  
To lock the system, you must set a password:  
ࡗ
 When you lock the system, you must enter and verify a 4-digit number password, which  
you make up.  
ࡗ
 Later, you must enter the same password to unlock the system, make changes to locked  
features, or access locked programs.  
When you have locked the system:  
ࡗ
 If you try to access a locked program or channel, the recorder displays a message  
prompting you to enter the password. You must also enter the password to access the  
Parental and System Locks menu.  
Ⅲ
Ⅲ
The system allows you three tries to enter the correct password.  
If you do not enter the correct password in three tries, the system does not allow  
more tries for several minutes.  
ࡗ
 If you enter the correct password, you can then access the locked item or the Parental  
and System Locks menu.  
ࡗ
 If you exit a locked item or the locks menu, you must reenter the password to access the  
item or menu again.  
If you forget your password, you will need to speak with a Service Center  
Representative. You may need to provide the following information: (1) your  
name; (2) your address; (3) your telephone number; (4) your recorder serial  
identification number; and, (5) your Personal Identification Number (PIN), if  
used.  
CREATING OR MODIFYING CHANNEL LOCKS  
Remote  
Menu Options  
Buttons  
1. Press the Mode button until the remote is in  
MODE  
SAT mode.  
MENU  
2. Press the Menu button to open the  
Main Menu.  
3. Select the Locks option.  
5
Locks  
5
Page 4-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the System  
Security Features  
4
4. If the system is locked, enter the  
system password using the number pad  
buttons. As soon as you enter the fourth  
digit of the password, the system  
highlights the OK option.  
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
*
*
*
*
Press the Select button.  
5. Select the Channel Locks option.  
2
Channel Locks  
2
6. Press the Left arrow button to move the  
highlight into the Channels list. Highlight  
each channel that you want to lock or  
unlock. If necessary, press the Up or Down  
arrow button to bring the desired channels  
into view.  
E
You can also enter each channel number  
directly using the number pad buttons.  
1
2
5
8
0
3
4
7
6
9
Press the Select button to lock or unlock the  
channel. If the checkbox next to the channel  
shows a checkmark in it, it is locked. If there  
is no checkmark, the channel is not locked.  
HBO-E - 300  
SELECT  
This is an unlocked channel  
FOX - 247  
This is an locked channel  
7. Press the Right arrow button to move the  
highlight to the options. Select the Save  
option to save the changes.  
Save  
W
8. If the system is not already locked, lock it to  
put the lock you just created into effect. See  
Locking the System on page 4-25.  
Page 4-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User and  
Installation Guide  
CREATING OR MODIFYING PROGRAM LOCKS  
Do the following to lock programs with certain rating or extended rating (content) codes.  
Only someone who knows the password can then view these programs. See Glossary on  
page A-7 for a definition of each of the rating codes.  
Parents beware, the rating and extended rating (content) codes that the system  
uses for program locks reflect the codes that the original program providers  
assigned to the programs. The actual content of the programs may differ from  
their assigned ratings.  
Remote  
Menu Options  
Buttons  
1. Press the Mode button until the remote is in  
MODE  
MENU  
SAT mode.  
2. Press the Menu button to open the  
Main Menu.  
3. Select the Locks option.  
5
Locks  
*
5
4. If the system is locked, enter the system  
password using the number pad buttons.  
As soon as you enter the fourth digit of  
the password, the system highlights the  
OK option. Press the Select button.  
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
*
*
*
5. Select the Ratings Locks option.  
1
Ratings Locks  
1
6. Highlight the rating that corresponds to the  
Rating  
lowest desired audience age.  
PG  
PG-13  
R
Note: All ratings that apply to audience age  
ranges above that of the selected rating are  
also selected.  
NC-17  
NR / AO  
For example, if you lock PG-13 rated  
programs, then all programs with the R,  
NC-17, and NR/AO rating are also locked.  
SELECT  
Press the Select button.  
Page 4-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the System  
Security Features  
4
7. Highlight the expanded rating code(s) to  
lock, if desired.  
Expanded Rating  
Violence  
Language  
Nudity  
Press the Select button.  
SELECT  
SELECT  
Sexual Content  
8. To unlock a rating code, highlight the  
code and then press the Select button.  
9. Select the Save option to save the changes.  
Save  
10.If the system is not locked, lock it to put the  
lock you just created into effect. See Locking  
the System on page 4-25.  
LOCKING THE RECORDER FRONT PANEL BUTTONS  
Do this procedure to set up the system to ignore all recorder front panel buttons except the  
Power button. This is useful if you want to prevent anyone else from changing the channel  
or selecting other programs. This does not lock the remote control buttons, so you should  
keep or hide the remote.  
Remote  
Menu Options  
Buttons  
1. Press the Mode button until the remote is in  
MODE  
SAT mode.  
MENU  
2. Press the Menu button to open the  
Main Menu.  
3. Select the Locks option.  
5
Locks  
*
5
4. If the system is locked, enter the system  
password using the number pad buttons.  
As soon as you enter the fourth digit of the  
password, the system highlights the  
OK option.  
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
*
*
*
Press the Select button.  
Page 4-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User and  
Installation Guide  
5. In the Parental and System Locks menu,  
select the Front Panel Lock option.  
4 Front Panel Lock  
4
6. At the Lock Front Panel Buttons screen,  
select the Lock option.  
Lock Front Panel Buttons  
Disable the operation of the front panel buttons.  
The system must be locked for this lock to take  
effect!  
7. If the system is not locked, lock it to put  
the lock you just created into effect. See  
Locking the System on page 4-25.  
Do you wish to lock the front panel buttons?  
Yes  
Cancel  
No  
UNLOCKING THE RECORDER BUTTONS  
Note: You must use the remote control to unlock the recorder front panel buttons.  
Remote  
Buttons  
Menu Options  
1. Press the Mode button until the remote is in  
MODE  
SAT mode.  
MENU  
2. Press the Menu button to open the Main Menu.  
3. Select the Locks option.  
5
Locks  
5
4. If the system is locked, enter the system  
1
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
*
*
*
*
password using the number pad buttons.  
As soon as you enter the fourth digit of  
the password, the system highlights the  
OK option.  
4
7
Press the Select button.  
5. Select the Front Panel Lock option.  
6. Select the Yes option.  
4 Front Panel Lock  
4
Yes  
ACCESSING A LOCKED ITEM  
Do the following to view a locked channel or program when the system is locked. See  
Ordering Pay Per View Programs on page 4-13 for the procedure to order a pay per view  
program when the system is locked.  
Page 4-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the System  
Security Features  
4
Remote  
Menu Options  
Buttons  
1. Choose a channel or a program that you have  
locked. The recorder displays an ATTENTION  
message telling you that the item is locked and  
prompting you to enter the system password.  
2. If the system is locked, enter the system  
password using the number pad buttons.  
As soon as you enter the fourth digit of  
the password, the system highlights the  
OK option. Press the Select button.  
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
*
*
*
*
3. Select the OK option.  
OK  
LOCKING THE SYSTEM  
Lock your system to put any channel, program rating, and front panel button locks you have  
created into effect.  
Locking your system will automatically lock the purchase of additional cost  
services, such as pay per view programs.  
If you forget your password, you will need to speak with a Service Center  
Representative. You may need to provide the following information:  
(1) your name; (2) your address; (3) your telephone number; (4) your  
recorder serial identification number; and, (5) your Personal Identification  
Number (PIN), if used.  
Remote  
Menu Options  
Buttons  
1. Press the Mode button until the remote is in  
MODE  
SAT mode.  
MENU  
2. Press the Menu button to open the  
Main Menu.  
Page 4-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User and  
Installation Guide  
3. Select the Locks option. If the system  
prompts you for a password, it has already  
been locked.  
5
3
Locks  
5
3
4. Select the Lock System option.  
The recorder displays a message prompting  
you to enter the system password.  
Note: If this option says "Unlock System"  
instead, then the system has already been  
locked.  
Lock System  
5. Enter and verify a password, using the  
number pad buttons. Write down the  
password and put it in a safe place.  
From this time on, you must enter this  
password to unlock the system.  
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
*
*
*
*
6. Select the OK option. All the locks you  
OK  
have created are now in effect.  
UNLOCKING THE SYSTEM  
After you do this procedure, all locks are turned off until you lock the system  
again.  
Remote  
Menu Options  
Buttons  
1. Press the Mode button until the remote is in  
MODE  
SAT mode.  
2. Press the Menu button to open the  
Main Menu.  
MENU  
3. Select the Locks option.  
5
Locks  
5
Page 4-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the System  
Security Features  
4
4. Enter the system password using the  
number pad buttons. As soon as you  
enter the fourth digit of the password,  
the system highlights the OK option.  
Press the Select button.  
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
*
*
*
*
5. Select the Unlock System option.  
Note: If this option says "Lock System"  
instead, then the system has already been  
locked.  
3
Unlock System  
3
CHANGING THE SYSTEM PASSWORD  
Remote  
Buttons  
Menu Options  
1. Press the Mode button until the remote is in  
MODE  
SAT mode.  
2. Press the Menu button to open the  
Main Menu.  
MENU  
3. Select the Locks option.  
5
Locks  
5
4. If the system is locked, enter the system  
password using the number pad buttons.  
As soon as you enter the fourth digit of  
the password, the system highlights the  
OK option. Press the Select button.  
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
*
*
*
*
5. Select the Change Password option.  
5 Change Password  
5
6. Enter the current password using the  
number pad buttons. As soon as you  
enter the fourth digit of the password,  
the system highlights the OK option.  
Press the Select button.  
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
*
*
*
*
Page 4-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User and  
Installation Guide  
7. Enter the new password using the number  
pad buttons. As soon as you enter the  
fourth digit of the password, the system  
highlights the OK option. Go on to the  
next step.  
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
*
*
*
*
8. Either: Select the OK option.  
OK  
or  
If you do not want to change the password,  
select the Cancel option to cancel the  
password change. You can stop here.  
Cancel  
9. Enter the new password again for  
verification, using the number pad  
buttons. As soon as you enter the fourth  
digit of the password, the system  
highlights the OK option. Press the  
Select button.  
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
*
*
*
*
Note: Write down the new password and  
keep it in a safe place.  
DISCARDING ALL SETUP INFORMATION  
If you want to discard changes using the system menus and reset the recorder to be the  
same as when it was shipped from the factory, do the following:  
When you reset the recorder to default settings, all event timers and settings  
that enable the recorder to control a VCR will be discarded.  
If you have defined security locks on the recorder, and the recorder is locked,  
these locks will not be discarded. If the recorder is unlocked, these locks will  
be discarded. (You can confirm whether locks have been discarded by opening  
the Program Guide and seeing if the lock symbol is displayed.)  
The system password is not discarded. You cannot reset the recorder to default  
settings to discard a password you have forgotten, nor can an unauthorized  
person do so to bypass a security lock.  
Page 4-28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the System  
Security Features  
4
Remote  
Menu Options  
Buttons  
1. Press the Mode button until the remote is in  
MODE  
SAT mode.  
2. Press the Menu button to open the  
Main Menu.  
MENU  
3. Select the System Setup option.  
4. Select the Installation option.  
5. Select the Factory Defaults option.  
6. Select the Yes option.  
6
1
System Setup  
Installation  
6
1
5
5 Factory Defaults  
Yes  
SERVICE CENTER SECURITY  
You can set up a Personal Identification Number (PIN) at the Dish Service Center for call-in  
requests only. Anyone calling the Service Center with a request must provide this PIN  
to authorize any transactions to your account, whether speaking with a Service Center  
Representative or using the Service Center automatic telephone assistance system. This  
includes purchasing services, making account inquiries, and overriding the system  
password.  
When you call the Service Center to authorize your service, you can set up a PIN. You  
may call the Service Center at any later time to set up a PIN.  
If you forget your PIN, you will need to speak with a Dish Service Center  
Representative. The Service Center Representative may ask for additional  
information to confirm that you are authorized to make transactions to your  
account.  
Page 4-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User and  
Installation Guide  
ELECTRONIC MAIL  
You may occasionally receive electronic mail from the Service Center via the satellite  
signal. If your recorder is powered on and the LED is blinking on the front panel, you  
have mail. This mail typically tells you about upcoming events, programs, special offers,  
and system changes. You may also receive mail that is specifically addressed to you, telling  
you about billing changes or asking you to call the Service Center.  
Note: You cannot send mail, only receive it.  
When you have unread messages, the following occurs.  
ࡗ
 When you press the Info button for information on a program, the Info menu displays  
an envelope.  
ࡗ
 The Power light on the recorder front panel flashes.  
It is important that you read, and then delete the mail messages that you  
receive. The recorder memory can store only a limited number of messages.  
If it receives more messages than it can hold, it deletes the oldest messages, as  
necessary, to make room. If this happens, you may miss important  
information.  
READING YOUR MAIL  
Remote  
Menu Options  
Buttons  
1. Press the Mode button until the remote is in  
MODE  
MENU  
SAT mode.  
2. Press the Menu button to open the  
Main Menu.  
3. Select the Mail option.  
3
Mail  
3
4. Use the arrow buttons to move the  
highlight to the mail message.  
Press Select.  
Select Mail to Read  
SELECT  
4/21 New From  
The Disney...  
4/12 Upgrade  
your program...  
3/25 Pay-Per-  
View Event...  
2/10 New  
Channel Added...  
Page 4-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the System  
Software Upgrades  
4
5. If necessary, press the Up or Down arrow  
button to view all of the message.  
6. Either: After you are finished reading,  
select the Delete option to delete the mail  
message.  
Delete  
Save  
or  
Select the Save option to save the message.  
SOFTWARE UPGRADES  
Occasionally, the Service Center may send you, at no extra cost, a list of newly available  
system features. These features will be sent to you using the "flash" feature, which allows  
you to get system upgrades via satellite. You can set up your system to automatically install  
these system upgrades, or you can have the system notify you before installing them.  
To set up your system to either notify you about new upgrades, or to automatically install  
new upgrades, do the following:  
Remote  
Menu Options  
Buttons  
1. Press the Mode button until the remote is in  
MODE  
MENU  
SAT mode.  
2. Press the Menu button to open the  
Main Menu.  
3. Select the System Setup option.  
4. Select the Preferences option.  
5. Select the System Upgrades option.  
6
5
System Setup  
Preferences  
6
5
4
4 System Upgrades  
Page 4-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User and  
Installation Guide  
6. Press the Left arrow button to move the  
highlight to the Without my permission  
option.  
E
7. Press the Up or Down arrow button to  
select either the Without my permission  
option to have upgrades automatically  
downloaded to your system or the Ask  
before downloading option to have  
upgrades downloaded with your  
Without my permission  
Ask before downloading  
authorization first. If you select the Ask  
before downloading option, the recorder  
will display a message to notify you when  
an upgrade is available.  
Note: With either option, the download will  
occur only when the recorder is off.  
8. Select the Save option.  
Save  
Page 4-32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the System  
Viewing Programs in Other Languages  
4
VIEWING PROGRAMS IN OTHER LANGUAGES  
You can change the language of the programs you view by using the Alternate Audio menu.  
To change to an alternate language, do the following:  
Note: An alternate language may not be available for all programs. Some programs, such  
as movies, indicate at the start of the program whether an alternate language is available.  
Also, the alternate language applies only to the audio portion of programs and does not  
change the menus displayed by the recorder.  
Remote  
Menu Options  
Buttons  
1. Press the Mode button until the remote is in  
MODE  
MENU  
SAT mode.  
2. Press the Menu button to open the Main Menu.  
3. Select the System Setup option.  
4. Select the Preferences option.  
6
5
System Setup  
Preferences  
6
5
1
5. Select the Alternate Audio option.  
1
Alternate Audio  
6. Press the Left arrow button to move the  
highlight to the list of languages.  
E
7. Use the Up or Down arrow button to  
highlight the desired language and  
press Select.  
Languages  
English  
Spanish  
French  
Note: If the program is being transmitted  
in a language not listed, then the Alternate  
option selects that language.  
If not, then the Alternate option selects  
English.  
German  
Italian  
Japanese  
SELECT  
Page 4-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User and  
Installation Guide  
8. Either: Select the Save option to save your  
language choice. The recorder returns to the  
System Setup menu.  
Save  
or  
Press the Cancel button to cancel any  
changes you have made in the Alternate  
Audio menu. The recorder displays a  
confirmation screen.  
At the Confirmation Screen,  
Either: Select the Yes option to abandon  
any language changes you have made.  
Yes  
No  
or  
Select the No option to save any language  
changes you have made. The recorder returns  
to the System Setup menu.  
Page 4-34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the System  
Setting Up Channel Order  
4
SETTING UP CHANNEL ORDER  
You can set up the Program Guide to display the channels either in ascending order (for  
example, from top to bottom, 122, 140, 170, 172, 200, ...) or in descending order (for  
example, from top to bottom, 200, 172, 170, 140, 122, ...).  
Note: If you do not specify a channel order, the recorder automatically displays the  
channels in ascending order.  
Remote  
Menu Options  
Buttons  
1. Press the Mode button until the remote is in  
MODE  
MENU  
SAT mode.  
2. Press the Menu button to open the  
Main Menu.  
3. Select the System Setup option.  
4. Select the Preferences option.  
6
5
3
System Setup  
Preferences  
6
5
3
5. Select the Channel Order option. This  
displays the Program Guide Channel  
Ordering menu.  
Channel Order  
6. Press the Left arrow button to move the  
highlight to the Ascending option.  
E
7. Press the Up or Down arrow button to  
select either the Ascending or  
Descending option.  
Ascending  
Descending  
8. Select the Save option.  
Save  
Page 4-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User and  
Installation Guide  
DIAGNOSTIC TESTS  
Diagnostic Tests are available for you to verify that the main components of your system  
are working correctly. The Diagnostics menu includes tests for the following  
components: front panel, remote control, dish signal, telephone connection, and the  
main unit (that is, the recorder). The Customer Service representative may ask you to  
perform some or all of these tests while trouble-shooting problems. To begin a  
diagnostic test of your system, do the following:  
STARTING A DIAGNOSTIC TEST  
Remote  
Menu Options  
Buttons  
1. Press the Mode button until the remote is in  
MODE  
MENU  
SAT mode.  
2. Press the Menu button to open the  
Main Menu.  
3. Select the System Setup option.  
4. Select the Diagnostics option.  
6
2
System Setup  
Diagnostics  
6
2
5. From the Diagnostics menu, select the  
diagnostic test that you would like to  
perform.  
Note: See the following procedures for the  
specific test you choose.  
FRONT PANEL DIAGNOSTIC TEST  
This test verifies that the buttons on the front panel of your recorder are working correctly.  
Remote  
Menu Options  
Buttons  
1. Select the Front Panel option.  
1
Front Panel  
1
Page 4-36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the System  
Diagnostic Tests  
4
2. Press any front panel button on your recorder, except the Power button. If the front  
panel is working correctly, the recorder briefly displays a message that says "Front  
Panel button." If the front panel is not working correctly, the recorder displays a  
failure message. See the Diagnostic Test section of the Problems and Solutions  
Tables on page A-18.  
POWER  
3. Press the Power button or Cancel button to  
end the test.  
Note: If you press the Power button to end  
the test, your recorder powers OFF.  
REMOTE CONTROL DIAGNOSTIC TEST  
This test verifies that the buttons on your remote control are working correctly.  
Remote  
Menu Options  
Buttons  
1. Select the Remote Control option.  
2
Remote Control  
2
2. Press any remote control button, except the Power, the Cancel, the Address, or the  
VCR buttons. If the remote control is working correctly, the recorder briefly displays  
a message that says "Remote Control button." If the remote control is not working  
correctly, the recorder displays a failure message. See the Diagnostic Test section of  
the Problems and Solutions Tables on page A-18.  
Note: This test does not cover the Address button.  
POWER  
3. Press the Power button or Cancel button to  
end the test.  
Note: If you press the Power button to end  
the test, your recorder powers OFF.  
Page 4-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User and  
Installation Guide  
DISH SIGNAL DIAGNOSTIC TEST  
This test verifies that your system has good signal reception.  
Select the Dish Signal option to begin the test. The recorder displays a message asking  
you to wait until the test is completed. If the system signal reception is normal, the  
recorder displays a message that says "Signal Reception OK." If the signal reception is  
not working correctly, the recorder displays a failure message. In this case, see the  
Diagnostic Test section of the Problems and Solutions Tables on page A-18.  
3
Dish Signal  
3
TELEPHONE CONNECTION DIAGNOSTIC TEST  
Select the Phone Connection option to begin the test. The recorder displays a message  
asking you to wait until the test is completed. If the telephone connection is correct, the  
recorder displays a message that says "Phone Connection OK." If the telephone is not  
connected properly, the recorder displays a failure message. In this case, see the  
Diagnostic Test section of the Problems and Solutions Tables on page A-18.  
4 Phone Connection  
4
MAIN UNIT DIAGNOSTIC TEST  
This test verifies that the recorder is working correctly.  
Select the Main Unit Test option to begin the test. The recorder displays a message  
asking you to wait until the test is completed. If the main unit is working correctly,  
the recorder displays a message that says "Main Unit OK." If the main unit is not  
working correctly, the recorder displays a failure message. In this case, call the JVC  
Service Center for assistance.  
Note: This test may temporarily distort the TV picture.  
5
Main Unit Test  
5
Page 4-38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the System  
Programming the Remote Control  
4
PROGRAMMING THE REMOTE CONTROL  
You can program the remote to control not only the recorder, but also your TV, and  
cable box or amplifier. This remote supports most brands and models; however, there  
may be some brands or models that it does not support. You can program the remote to  
control a maximum of four different electronic components. Which component is being  
controlled by the remote depends on the current mode:  
ࡗ
 The built-in satellite receiver (controlled in SAT mode)  
ࡗ
 The TV set (controlled in TV mode)  
ࡗ
 The built-in video recorder (controlled in D-VHS mode)  
ࡗ
 One auxiliary item, such as an amplifier, a cable TV box, or a second TV or VCR  
(controlled in AUX mode).  
The remote is already programmed to control the built-in receiver. However, if you have  
multiple receivers and remotes, you may need to set a unique address for the receiver/  
recorder, to prevent interference.  
Before beginning the following procedures, make sure that all electronic components are  
powered ON. Make sure that there are fresh batteries installed in the remote.  
Then, do the following:  
Remote Buttons  
1. Turn ON the piece of equipment you want to program  
the remote to control.  
2. Find the brand name of the equipment in the equipment  
codes table beginning on page 4-44.  
Note: If there is more than one code listed for the brand,  
try each until the remote is able to control the equipment.  
3. Press the Mode button on the remote until the mode light  
MODE  
that matches the equipment flashes rapidly.  
Note: Select the AUX mode for audio amplifiers, cable  
boxes, second TVs or second VCRs.  
4. Press the Address button. The mode light continues to  
ADDRESS  
flash more slowly.  
Page 4-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User and  
Installation Guide  
5. Use the number pad buttons to enter the first 3-digit code  
listed for your equipment brand in the table. The mode  
light stops flashing and stays lit.  
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
Note: If you are entering a code for the AUX mode, you  
have to enter a four-digit code. The first digit is the code  
for the piece of equipment:  
0 - indicates a second TV  
1 - indicates a second VCR  
For example, to program the AUX mode to control a  
Sony TV, enter 0 and then 000.  
If you are programming for an amplifier or cable TV  
box, the codes shown in the table include the first digit.  
ADDRESS  
6. Press the Address button. If the code you entered is  
valid, the mode light blinks three times.  
POWER  
7. Test if the code works for the equipment by pressing the  
Power button. If it is the correct code, the equipment  
should turn OFF.  
8. Turn the equipment back ON and try some other  
functions to make sure you have the correct code.  
Occasionally the Power button may work when others  
do not.  
If the code works, then you can stop here. Write all the  
codes you programmed into the remote on the sticker on  
the inside of the remote battery cover, and on the inside  
back cover of this Guide.  
Note: When you change the batteries in the remote, you  
may need to reprogram these codes back into the remote.  
9. If the code you entered is not correct, repeat steps 4  
through 8, using another code from the table.  
10.If you have tried all of the codes listed for your  
equipment without success, or if you cannot find your  
equipment manufacture's name in the table, do the  
procedure in The Power Scan: If Your Brand is Not  
Listed on the next page.  
Note: You have a limited time to program the remote  
control after pressing the Mode button. Start the programming  
procedure again if the mode indicator is no longer lit.  
Page 4-40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the System  
Programming the Remote Control  
4
REDUCING THE RANGE OF THE UHF REMOTE CONTROL  
If a neighbor frequently uses a UHF remote control, the signals from that remote may  
block signals from your remote from reaching your recorder. To prevent such  
interference, you can install a 10 dB F-connector attenuator. This will reduce the sensitivity  
of the recorder to UHF signals, so it will not respond to signals from distant remotes.  
Attenuators are available at some electronics supply and satellite TV stores or from JVC  
parts at 1-800-882-2345. The JVC part number for this attenuator is T500511.  
Note: Installing the attenuator will substantially reduce the operating range of your  
remote.  
To install an attenuator,  
1. Remove the UHF Antenna from the UHF Remote Antenna connection on the recorder  
back panel.  
2. Attach a 10 dB attenuator to the UHF Remote Antenna connection.  
3. Attach the UHF Antenna to the attenuator.  
THE POWER SCAN: IF YOUR BRAND IS NOT LISTED  
If your equipment brand is not listed in the equipment codes, or if the listed codes do not  
work, you can set up the remote to scan through all the codes, testing each one.  
Once the remote reaches a possible correct code, the equipment (whether VCR, TV, or  
other), powers ON or OFF. Once this happens, try some other functions to make sure  
you have the correct code. Occasionally, the Power button may work when others do not.  
Note: If you start this procedure, and at any time do not press a button within 20  
seconds, the remote will end the procedure automatically.  
Remote Buttons  
1. Press the Mode button on the remote until the  
MODE  
appropriate mode light is flashing rapidly.  
2. Press the Address button. The mode light starts  
ADDRESS  
flashing more slowly.  
3. Press the Power button. The mode light stops flashing  
POWER  
and stays lit.  
Page 4-41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User and  
Installation Guide  
4. Press the Up or Down arrow button to set the remote to  
the next code. The Down arrow button scans backward,  
and the Up arrow button scans forward.  
When the correct code is reached, the equipment  
(whether VCR, TV, or other) powers OFF.  
5. Press the Address button to store the code in the remote.  
If the code is valid for your remote, the mode light blinks  
three times.  
ADDRESS  
6. Power the equipment back ON.  
7. Try some other functions to make sure you have the  
correct code. Occasionally the Power function may  
work when others do not.  
8. If the other buttons work, do the procedure in the  
following section.  
9. If the other buttons do not work, power the equipment  
back on and repeat steps 2 through 7. The scan resumes  
from the last code stored.  
The mode light flashes rapidly when the scan has  
returned to the starting point and all codes have been  
tested for that equipment.  
Note: Remember that the remote may not control some  
equipment models.  
Page 4-42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the System  
Programming the Remote Control  
4
DETERMINING THE CURRENT REMOTE SETTINGS  
You can find out which code is currently set for each remote mode.  
Remote Buttons  
1. Press the Mode button on the remote until the  
MODE  
appropriate mode light is flashing rapidly.  
2. Press the Address button twice.  
ADDRESS  
For SAT mode, the mode light flashes the number of  
times that matches the recorder address.  
For example, if the recorder is addressed to 4, the mode  
light flashes four times.  
For TV, D-VHS, and AUX modes, the mode light flashes  
the number of times to indicate each digit of the current  
code. There will be a pause between the flash sequences  
for the digits. A quick flash indicates zero (0).  
For example, for an AUX code of 0136, the mode light  
flashes once quickly (for zero), then once, three times,  
and six times.  
Note: Remember that the AUX mode has a 4-digit code.  
3. Write all the codes you programmed into the remote on  
the sticker on the inside of the remote battery cover, and  
on the inside back cover of this Guide.  
Note: When you change the batteries in the remote, you  
may need to reprogram these codes back into the remote.  
Page 4-43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User and  
Installation Guide  
EQUIPMENT CODES FOR PROGRAMMING THE REMOTE  
TELEVISIONS  
JBL  
Jensen  
JVC  
Kawasho  
Kenwood  
Kloss  
066  
056  
Samsung  
Sanyo  
005, 006, 016, 023, 026,  
032, 088, 112, 195, 204,  
221  
042, 089, 090, 091, 092,  
109  
088  
088  
Note: Not all the codes  
listed in these tables are  
valid for all remote  
controls.  
057, 058, 059, 060  
061  
006  
SBR  
Schneider  
Scott  
022, 110  
026, 039, 040, 041  
KTV  
026, 034, 037, 041, 093  
Akai  
Alba  
032, 070  
Lloyds  
Lloytron  
Loewe  
Logik  
Luxman  
LXI  
195  
026  
088  
018  
023  
Sears  
003, 023, 034, 042, 063,  
089, 090, 094, 095, 096,  
097, 098, 099, 100, 101,  
102, 103, 104, 117, 195,  
203  
113  
A-Mark  
Amstrad  
Anam  
120  
033  
009, 021, 041, 120, 121  
AOC  
005, 006, 019, 020, 120,  
195  
Seimitsu  
Sharp  
195  
003, 063, 066, 090, 095,  
117, 125  
006, 020, 025, 064, 065,  
067, 068, 069, 110, 210  
006, 066, 088  
032, 109  
195  
018, 032, 090, 195  
004, 005, 006, 071, 195  
004, 005, 070, 071, 072,  
123, 195, 205, 207  
026, 091, 105, 106, 107,  
108, 128, 129  
091  
Archer  
120  
Magnavox  
Audiovox  
Bauer  
120  
111  
Siemens  
Signature  
Solavox  
Sony  
Soundesign  
Spectricon  
Squareview  
SSS  
Marantz  
Matsui  
Megatron  
Memorex  
MGA  
018  
Candle  
006, 022, 023, 025, 195  
112  
Capehart  
Circuit City  
Citizen  
019, 195  
195  
006, 016, 022, 023, 024,  
025 , 026  
000, 109, 119, 122  
025, 041, 195  
020, 120  
194  
Mitsubishi  
Concerto  
Contec  
Craig  
023  
005, 041  
023  
022  
006, 025, 064, 065, 066,  
068, 110, 111  
027, 028, 041, 091  
021, 041, 194  
026  
MTC  
005, 006, 016, 023, 031,  
195  
002, 117, 195  
009, 021, 197  
Supra  
Supre-Macy  
Sylvania  
Crown  
NAD  
National  
National Quenties 197  
Curtis Mathes  
CXC  
006, 016, 026, 203  
041  
Symphonic  
Tandy  
Tatung  
Technics  
Techwood  
Teknika  
132, 194  
105, 113  
009  
008  
023  
Daewoo  
005, 024, 026, 029, 030,  
031, 032, 219  
NEC  
005, 006, 007, 017, 023,  
127  
112, 113, 118  
195  
051, 217  
041  
Daytron  
Dixi  
Dumont  
Electrohome  
Elta  
026, 195  
032, 088, 120  
195  
026, 195, 209, 213  
032  
Nikkai  
Nikko  
Normande  
Onwa  
004, 005, 016, 018, 022,  
023, 024, 025, 026, 034,  
041, 114, 115  
051  
051  
032  
013  
Optonica  
Orion  
Osaki  
Osume  
Panasonic  
105, 107  
194  
112  
Emerson  
026, 027, 028, 033, 034,  
035, 037, 038, 039, 040,  
041, 122, 195, 220  
Teleavia  
Telefunken  
Teletech  
Tera  
091  
Envision  
Etron  
006  
032  
008, 009, 010, 011, 012,  
066, 074, 075, 197, 200,  
206  
Thomas  
Thompson  
Thomson  
TMK  
195  
209  
Fisher  
042, 090  
111  
Formenti  
Fortress  
Fujitsu  
Funai  
Futuretech  
Penney  
Philco  
003, 005, 006, 014, 016,  
026, 043, 096  
005, 006, 025, 064, 065,  
068, 110  
066, 088  
002, 048, 051, 076  
005, 026  
051, 116  
023, 195  
016, 090, 096, 117, 118,  
131  
105  
034, 194  
034, 041, 194  
041, 194  
Toshiba  
Philips  
Pioneer  
Portland  
Proton  
Tosonic  
028  
026  
195  
043  
General Electric 003, 008, 009, 015, 040,  
Totevision  
Toyomenko  
Universal  
Vector Research 006  
Victor 057  
Video Concepts 070  
Vidtech  
Viking  
Wards  
(GE)  
043, 044, 130, 195  
013, 019, 026, 124, 195  
001  
008, 009, 077, 200  
026, 041, 107, 112  
003, 005, 014, 015, 048,  
079, 080, 081, 082, 083,  
084, 085, 086, 087, 125,  
133, 134  
Genexxa  
Goldstar  
113  
Pulsar  
005, 023, 026, 045, 046,  
088,195  
Quasar  
Radio Shack  
RCA  
Granada  
Grundig  
Hallmark  
Hinari  
195  
047  
195  
034  
005, 195  
022  
005, 006, 015, 018, 034,  
043, 064, 065, 067, 068  
Hitachi  
023, 026, 048, 049, 050,  
051, 052, 053, 054, 055,  
126, 202, 213  
Realistic  
Saba  
Saisho  
Sampo  
090  
051  
032, 033, 109  
006, 019  
Yamaha  
York  
Zenith  
Zonda  
005, 006  
195  
001, 018  
120  
Infinity  
066  
Page 4-44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installation and Setup  
Equipment Codes for Programming the Remote  
4
VCRS  
Mitsubish  
062, 067, 068, 069, 070,  
071, 109  
044, 080, 088  
088, 089, 091  
073  
030, 031, 032, 062, 092,  
099, 100, 101, 102, 103,  
104  
Video Concepts 068, 100  
Videosonic  
Wards  
091  
MTC  
Multitech  
NAD  
027, 054, 080, 085, 088,  
089, 090, 091, 107, 108,  
109  
Aiwa  
Akai  
088, 122, 123, 124  
013, 014, 015, 016, 017,  
018, 019, 020, 068  
046  
088  
065  
Yamaha  
Zenith  
030, 092, 100, 101  
001, 002, 033  
NEC  
Alba  
Amstrad  
ASA  
Optonica  
Orion  
Panasonic  
085  
006, 007, 129  
Audio Dynamics 100  
TUNERS/AMPLIFIERS  
Broksonic  
Bush  
Candle  
Canon  
Capehart  
Citizen  
Craig  
Curtis Mathes  
Daewoo  
059  
089  
021, 022, 023, 024, 026,  
054, 098, 114, 128  
054, 080  
037, 092  
088  
054, 111  
054, 065, 085  
062, 073, 074, 075, 076,  
100  
080, 092, 093  
042, 054  
043, 046  
091, 092, 093  
091, 108  
054, 092, 105  
Penney  
Pentax  
Perdio  
Philco  
Philips  
Pioneer  
Aiwa  
0156, 0168, 0180, 0184  
Akai  
0167  
Carver  
Denon  
Fisher  
0153, 0172  
0174  
0153, 0172  
0165  
GE  
034, 046, 047, 093, 126,  
127  
Goldstar  
JVC  
Kenwood  
Luxman  
LXI  
0177  
0157, 0183  
0176  
0181  
0165  
Portland  
Proscan  
Pulsar  
046, 093  
Daytron  
DBX  
Dumont  
Dynatch  
Electrohome  
Emerson  
046  
100  
049  
088  
109  
105  
033  
081  
Quartz  
Quasar  
Radio Shack  
RCA  
054, 077, 078  
107, 108, 109, 110  
Marantz  
Memorex  
NAD  
0151  
0175  
0169  
005, 006, 007, 008, 009,  
010, 011, 012, 059, 068,  
088, 090, 109, 118  
025, 026, 027, 028, 029,  
037, 091, 105, 106, 115,  
130, 131  
049, 054, 080, 081, 084,  
085, 088  
002  
006, 007  
Nakamichi  
Onkyo  
Optimus  
Panasonic  
Pioneer  
Proton  
Quasar  
RCA  
0171  
0160, 0162, 0178  
0164  
0152  
0158, 0175, 0179  
0154  
Finlandia  
Finlux  
Fisher  
049  
Realistic  
049, 065, 088  
048, 049, 084, 108, 110  
088  
Ricoh  
Saisho  
Salora  
Samsung  
Sansui  
Sanyo  
Funai  
General Electric 050, 051, 052, 054, 091,  
(GE)  
067, 081  
017, 034, 079, 080, 091  
032, 044, 062, 100, 121  
049, 081, 082, 083, 108  
105  
0152  
0155  
Goldstar  
Goodmans  
Go Video  
Granada  
Grundig  
Harman Kardon 030, 069  
Hinari  
Hitachi  
030, 055, 092, 112, 113  
085, 089  
120  
049, 081  
065  
Realistic  
Scott  
0165, 0166  
0159  
SBR  
065  
Sherwood  
Sony  
Symphonic  
Technics  
Victor  
0170  
Schneider  
Scott  
Sears  
Sentra  
Sharp  
089  
008, 059, 090  
048, 049, 081, 084  
046  
0173, 0180  
0166  
0152  
089  
036, 037, 038, 039, 040,  
041, 088, 096, 097  
018  
0157  
085, 107, 109, 125  
Yamaha  
0163, 0182  
Shintom  
Sony  
Sylvania  
Symphonic  
Tandy  
089  
ITT  
000, 001, 002, 003, 004  
054, 067, 088, 111  
088  
088  
JC Penney  
Jensen  
JVC  
030, 054, 091, 100, 101  
060  
061, 062, 063, 064, 092,  
100, 101  
062, 081, 092, 100, 101  
088  
CABLE TV BOXES  
Tashiko  
Tatung  
Teac  
Technics  
Teknika  
TMK  
Toshiba  
Totevision  
Unitech  
Vector Research 030, 100  
Victor 061, 062, 100  
088  
Kenwood  
Lloyd  
GI/Tocom  
Hamlin  
Jerrold  
0140  
086, 101  
088, 101  
054  
054, 087, 088  
006  
034, 035, 067, 090  
080, 091  
080  
0147, 0148  
0135, 0136, 0137, 0149  
0146  
Logik  
Luxor  
Magnavox  
Marantz  
089  
018  
Oak  
027, 054, 065, 111  
030, 054, 065, 085, 092,  
100, 101, 103  
Panasonic  
Pioneer  
0144, 0145  
0142, 0143  
Scientific Atlanta 0138, 0139, 0150  
Zenith 0141  
MEI  
054  
Memorex  
033, 049, 054, 066, 081,  
085, 088, 108  
067, 068, 109  
MGA  
Page 4-45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User and  
Installation Guide  
NOTES  
Page 4-46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
VCR Features  
5
SIMPLE PLAYBACK AND RECORDING  
This recorder has a built-in VCR which will let you play back tapes that have been recorded  
in the D-VHS (bit stream) and VHS (analog) formats, as well as make your own recordings  
in the D-VHS and VHS formats. D-VHS cassettes and VHS can be used in the HM-  
DSR100DU/RU. For information on what types of cassettes can be used and which record-  
ing formats they work with, see the table below.  
When loading a cassette, make sure the window side is up, the rear label side  
is facing you and the arrow on the front of the cassette is pointing towards the  
VCR. Do not apply excessive pressure when inserting. Incorrectly loaded  
cassettes can damage the recorder and/or the cassette being used.  
COMPATIBILITY OF CASSETTES AND RECORDING MODES  
Recording Mode  
Channel  
Satellite Channel  
Local Channel  
AUX  
Cassette  
Bit Stream Recording Analog Recording  
(D-VHS)  
(VHS)  
Yes  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
Yes  
D-VHS  
VHS  
*
Yes  
D-VHS  
VHS  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
D-VHS  
VHS  
Yes  
The recording time when the  
provided DF-180 cassette is used.  
SP: 90 min  
EP: 270 min  
D-VHS: 180 min  
* You can record the same duration as described on the cassette.  
The recording speed for bit stream (D-VHS) recordings remains unchanged regardless of  
this setting.  
Notes:  
ࡗ
 S-VHS recording is not possible on this unit.  
ࡗ
 S-VHS- recorded tapes cannot be played back on this unit. Make sure you turn the  
"D-VHS" recording mode off if you intend to record a digital satellite recording on a  
S-VHS cassette. We recommend that you only record digital "bit stream" signals on  
D-VHS cassettes.  
Page 5-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User and  
Installation Guide  
SIMPLE PLAYBACK  
To play back a D-VHS or VHS tape, do the following:  
Remote  
Buttons  
Menu Options  
1. Load a cassette into the cassette loading slot.  
ࡗ
 The VCR's power comes on automatically.  
ࡗ
 If the cassette's record safety tab has been  
removed, playback begins automatically.  
2. If you want to rewind or fast forward to a  
different section of the tape, press the  
Rewind or Fast Forward button.  
3. Press the Stop button to stop winding.  
4. Press the Play button to start tape playback.  
ࡗ
 When playing back a tape recorded in the EP  
mode, the EP indicator on the front panel  
will light.  
5. Press the Stop button to stop the tape,  
and then press the Eject button on the  
recorder's front panel to eject the tape.  
Notes:  
ࡗ
 Compact VHS camcorder tapes recorded in normal VHS mode can be played on this  
video recorder. Simply place the recorded cassette into a VHS Cassette Adapter and it  
can be used just like any full-sized VHS cassette.  
ࡗ
 Super VHS recordings can not be played back on this recorder.  
Page 5-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
VCR Features  
Simple Playback and Recording  
5
SIMPLE RECORDING  
Remember that both digital and analog signals can be recorded on a D-VHS tape, and that  
only analog signals can be recorded on a VHS tape. Follow the following procedure to  
record on a D-VHS or VHS tape:  
Remote  
Menu Options  
Buttons  
1. Press the Mode button until the remote is in  
MODE  
the SAT mode.  
2. Load a cassette into the cassette loading slot.  
ࡗ
 Make sure the record safety tab is intact.  
ࡗ
 If the tab is missing, cover the hole with  
adhesive tape before inserting the cassette.  
3. Either: Enter the desired 3-digit channel  
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
number.  
or  
Press the Up or Down arrow button to  
highlight the desired channel.  
or  
Press the CH  
or  
button on the  
recorder's front panel.  
TV/VCR  
ࡗ
 If you use the RF connection, you can  
select the VIDEO mode to view the  
program to be recorded by pressing the  
TV/VCR button.  
Page 5-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User and  
Installation Guide  
4. Use the arrow buttons to select Bit Stream  
(D-VHS) Recording "ON" or "OFF" in  
the Mode section of the VCR Setup  
screen. Refer to the next page for further  
instructions.  
ࡗ
 Bit Stream (D-VHS) Recording is possible  
only when you record a satellite channel  
using a D-VHS cassette, and when Bit  
Stream (D-VHS) Recording setting is set  
to "ON".  
5. Use the arrow buttons to select the  
Recording Speed ("SP" or "EP") for  
analog recordings in the Mode section  
of the VCR Setup screen. Refer to the  
next page for further instructions.  
ࡗ
 When EP is selected, the EP indicator  
on the recorder's front panel lights.  
ࡗ
 The recording speed for bit stream  
(D-VHS) recordings remains unchanged  
regardless of this setting.  
SP  
EP  
6. Press the Rec(ord) button.  
ࡗ
 The REC indicator on the front panel lights  
during recording.  
REC  
7. If you wish to pause recording at any time,  
press the Pause button. Pressing the Play  
button will resume recording.  
ࡗ
 The REC and PAUSE indicators on the  
front panel both remain lit while recording  
is paused.  
ࡗ
 While recording is paused, neither the channel  
nor the recording speed can be changed. Press  
the Stop button first, and then change the  
channel/recording speed as necessary.  
8. Press the Stop button to stop the tape, and  
then press the Eject button on the recorder's  
front panel to eject the tape.  
Accidental erasure prevention  
ࡗ
 To prevent accidental recording on a recorded cassette, remove its record safety tab.  
To record on it later, cover the hole with adhesive tape.  
Page 5-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
VCR Features  
Simple Playback and Recording  
5
SETTING THE BIT STREAM (D-VHS) RECORDING AND TAPE SPEED  
Remember that a D-VHS tape can record both bit stream and analog signals, while a VHS  
tape can record only analog signals. To record on a D-VHS or VHS tape, do the following:  
Remote  
Menu Options  
Buttons  
1. Press the Mode button until the remote is in  
MODE  
MENU  
the SAT mode.  
2. Press the Menu button to open the  
Main Menu.  
3. Select the VCR Setup option.  
8
VCR Setup  
8
4. Press the arrow buttons to select Bit  
Stream (D-VHS) Recording (On, Off),  
or to select the Tape Speed (SP/EP),  
and then press the Select button.  
Mode  
SP  
EP  
D-VHS On  
D-VHS Off  
5. Press the arrow buttons to move the  
Save  
highlight to Save.  
6. Press the Select button to save all  
SELECT  
changes.  
Page 5-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User and  
Installation Guide  
PLAYBACK FEATURES  
To make finding and playing the taped program or scene you want as easy as possible, the  
recording is equipped with a variety of convenient playback features.  
HIGH-SPEED SEARCH  
Best with: Analog recordings.  
To search for a location with a high-speed visual playback picture, do the following:  
Remote  
Menu Options  
Buttons  
1. During playback or still, press the Fast  
Forward button for high-speed search,  
or press the Rewind button for reverse  
high-speed search.  
2. To resume normal playback, press the Play  
button.  
Notes:  
ࡗ
 When playing back an analog recorded tape, the search speed is 7 times normal play-  
back with SP recordings, and 21 times normal with EP recordings.  
ࡗ
 When this function is used while playing back a bit stream recorded tape, the search  
speed will be 14 times normal but no playback picture will appear.  
ࡗ
 For short searches, during playback or still press and hold the Fast Forward or Rewind  
button for over 2 seconds. When released, normal playback resumes.  
REW/BROWSE AND FF/BROWSE  
Best with: Bit stream recordings.  
This function finds the location where index codes are placed and automatically activates  
fast forward search for about 5 seconds, then resumes fast forwarding or rewinding.  
Do the following:  
Remote  
Menu Options  
Buttons  
1. Press the Mode button until the remote is in  
MODE  
the D-VHS mode.  
2. While the tape is stopped, press the  
REW/BROWSE  
REW/Browse or FF/Browse button.  
7
FF/BROWSE  
9
Page 5-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
VCR Features  
Playback Features  
5
3. To stop, press the Stop button at any time.  
Notes:  
ࡗ
 When playing back a bit stream recorded tape, the program information for the program  
being fast forwarded is displayed on the TV screen for about 5 seconds, but the playback  
picture may appear frozen (still picture) or block noise may appear during search.  
ࡗ
 When playing back an analog recorded tape, a fast-motion playback picture appears, but  
no program information is displayed.  
SKIP SEARCH  
Best with: Analog recordings.  
This function lets you skip over commercials while watching recorded programs, or quickly  
zoom back to a scene that has just been played. Do the following:  
Remote  
Menu Options  
Buttons  
1. Press the Mode button until the remote is in  
MODE  
the D-VHS mode.  
SKIP  
2. During playback, press the Skip  
or  
button 1 to 4 times. Each press initiates a  
30-second period of fast-motion or reverse-  
motion playback.  
6
SKIP  
4
Normal playback resumes automatically.  
Notes:  
ࡗ
 To return immediately to normal playback during a Skip Search, press the Play button.  
ࡗ
 When playing back a bit stream recorded tape, there is no playback picture during  
search.  
Page 5-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User and  
Installation Guide  
INDEX SEARCH  
Best with: Bit stream and analog recordings.  
Index codes are placed on the tape at the start of each recording. You can find and automati-  
cally play back from the start of any recording using the Index Search function.  
Do the following:  
Remote  
Menu Options  
Buttons  
1. Press the Mode button until the remote is in  
MODE  
the D-VHS mode.  
2. While the tape is stopped, press the Index  
™ or £ button.  
™INDEX  
1
INDEX£  
To access a recording 2—9 index codes away,  
press the Index ™ or £ button repeatedly  
until the correct number is displayed on  
screen (only if Superimpose is set to ON  
(see pg. 5-12). Playback begins automatically  
when the desired recording is located.  
3
Notes:  
ࡗ
 If necessary, press the Rewind or Fast Forward button when play starts to search  
visually to find the exact beginning of the desired program.  
ࡗ
 An index code is not placed on the tape when recording is paused and then resumed.  
Page 5-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
VCR Features  
Playback Features  
5
STILL PICTURE/FRAME-BY-FRAME PLAYBACK  
Best with: Analog recordings.  
To "freeze" the playback picture and view it one frame at a time, do the following:  
Remote  
Menu Options  
Buttons  
1. Press the Mode button until the remote is in  
MODE  
the D-VHS mode.  
2. During playback, press the Pause button.  
ࡗ
 If there is vertical jitter, use the Up or Down  
arrow button to correct the picture.  
3. For frame-by-frame playback, press the  
Pause button repeatedly to advance one  
frame at a time.  
ࡗ
 Frame-by-frame is not possible with  
bit stream recorded tapes.  
4. To resume normal playback, press the Play  
button.  
SLOW MOTION  
Only with: Analog recordings.  
To view the playback picture at a slower speed, do the following:  
Remote  
Buttons  
Menu Options  
1. Press the Mode button until the remote is in  
MODE  
the D-VHS mode.  
2. During playback or still, press and hold the  
Pause button for over 2 seconds.  
3. To resume normal playback, press the Play  
button.  
Notes:  
ࡗ
 If noise bars appear during slow motion, press the remote's Up or Down arrow button a  
few times to remove the noise bars from the screen. You may wish to turn off the  
superimpose function during this adjustment (see page 5-12).  
ࡗ
 Slow motion is not possible with bit stream recorded tapes.  
Page 5-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User and  
Installation Guide  
MANUAL TRACKING  
Best with: Bit stream and analog recordings.  
Once playback begins, the recorder's automatic tracking functions is engaged. If noise  
appears in the picture, you can override this and make the adjustment manually by doing the  
following:  
Remote  
Menu Options  
Buttons  
1. Press the Mode button until the remote is in  
MODE  
the D-VHS mode.  
2. During playback, press the Auto Track  
button on the remote to cancel the  
automatic tracking mode and enable  
manual tracking adjustment.  
AUTO TRACK  
5
3. Press the Up or Down arrow button on  
the remote, to adjust the tracking.  
ࡗ
 Press briefly for fine adjustments, or  
press and hold for substantial adjustment.  
Watch the screen and continue adjusting  
until optimum picture and sound quality  
are achieved.  
AUTO TRACK  
4. To re-engage automatic tracking, press the  
Auto Track button on the remote again.  
5
Notes:  
ࡗ
 To obtain a noiseless still picture it may be necessary to adjust tracking in slow motion  
and then engage Pause.  
ࡗ
 Manual tracking is possible during slow motion. Press the remote's Up or Down arrow  
button to adjust tracking during slow motion playback.  
Page 5-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
VCR Features  
Playback Features  
5
VIDEO STABILIZER  
Only with: Playback of analog recorded tapes.  
You can correct vertical vibration when playing back unstable EP recordings that were made  
on another VCR. To turn this function on for automatic correction of vertical vibration, do  
the following:  
Remote  
Menu Options  
Buttons  
1. Press the Mode button until the remote is in  
MODE  
MENU  
the SAT mode.  
2. Press the Menu button to open the  
Main Menu.  
3. Select the VCR Setup option.  
8
VCR Setup  
8
4. Press the arrow buttons to move the  
highlight to Video stabilizer in the  
Options list.  
5. Press the Select button to place a  
checkmark in the checkbox next to  
Video stabilizer. Pressing the Select  
button again will remove the checkmark.  
Video stabilizer  
SELECT  
6. Press the arrow buttons to move the  
Save  
highlight to Save.  
7. Press the Select button to save all  
SELECT  
changes.  
Notes:  
ࡗ
 Video Stabilizer does not operate during recording, during special effects playback,  
during playback of a recording made at SP speed, and during playback of a bit stream  
recorded D-VHS tape.  
ࡗ
 When you finish viewing the tape, be sure to turn this function back off.  
ࡗ
 Turning the VCR's power on or inserting a cassette into the recorder will automatically  
turn this function off.  
Page 5-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User and  
Installation Guide  
SUPERIMPOSE  
This function, which can be switched on or off, determines whether or not the recorder's  
operational indicators will appear on the TV screen. Do the following:  
Remote  
Menu Options  
Buttons  
1. Press the Mode button until the remote is in  
MODE  
MENU  
the SAT mode.  
2. Press the Menu button to open the  
Main Menu.  
3. Select the VCR Setup option.  
8
VCR Setup  
8
4. Press the arrow buttons to move the  
highlight to Superimpose in the  
Options list.  
5. Press the Select button to remove the  
checkmark from the checkbox next to  
Superimpose. Pressing the Select  
button again will put a checkmark  
there again.  
Superimpose  
SELECT  
6. Press the arrow buttons to move the  
Save  
highlight to Save.  
7. Press the Select button to save all  
SELECT  
changes.  
Note:  
ࡗ
 When the View button is pressed, all indications corresponding to the current status are  
displayed for 5 seconds.  
Page 5-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
VCR Features  
Playback Features  
5
SELECTING THE SOUNDTRACK  
Only with: Playback of analog recorded tapes.  
The recorder can record two soundtracks simultaneously (Hi-Fi and Normal) and play back  
the selected one, or both together. To choose, do the following:  
Remote  
Menu Options  
Buttons  
1. Press the Mode button until the remote is in  
MODE  
MENU  
the SAT mode.  
2. Press the Menu button to open the  
Main Menu.  
3. Select the VCR Setup option.  
8
VCR Setup  
8
4. Press the arrow buttons to move the  
highlight to the Audio list.  
5. Press the Up or Down arrow button to  
move the highlight to the audio track  
you wish to hear: Hi-Fi, Normal or  
Mixed.  
Audio  
HI-FI  
Normal  
Mixed  
Save  
6. Press the arrow buttons to move the  
highlight to Save.  
7. Press the Select button to save  
SELECT  
all changes.  
Note:  
ࡗ
 If the tape being played back has no Hi-Fi soundtrack, the Normal soundtrack will be  
heard no matter what choice you make in the Audio mode list.  
Page 5-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User and  
Installation Guide  
COUNTER RESET  
To reset the counter reading to zero, do the following:  
Remote  
Menu Options  
Buttons  
1. Press the Mode button until the remote is in  
MODE  
the D-VHS mode.  
2. Press the Counter Reset button.  
ࡗ
 The counter is reset, and the new counter  
reading is displayed on the TV screen.  
RECALL  
COUNTER RESET  
Note:  
ࡗ
 If the counter reading does not appear on the TV screen although you want it to appear,  
turn on the Superimpose function (see Superimpose on page 5–12).  
COUNTER MEMORY  
When the Rewind or Fast Forward button is pressed with the Counter Memory function  
activated, the tape will return to the counter position "zero" and automatically stop.  
To activate, do the following:  
Remote  
Menu Options  
Buttons  
1. Press the Menu button to open the  
Main Menu.  
MENU  
2. Select the VCR Setup option.  
8
VCR Setup  
8
3. Press the arrow buttons to move the  
highlight to Counter Memory in the  
Options list.  
4. Press the Select button to place a  
checkmark in the checkbox next to  
Counter Memory. Pressing the Select  
button again will remove the checkmark.  
Counter Memory  
SELECT  
Page 5-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
VCR Features  
Playback Features  
5
5. Press the arrow buttons to move the  
Save  
highlight to Save.  
6. Press the Select button to save  
SELECT  
all changes.  
Note:  
ࡗ
 If Counter Memory is turned on, "Memory" appears in the View Banner displayed on  
the TV screen.  
REPEAT PLAYBACK  
To repeatedly play the same tape 20 times consecutively, unattended, do the following:  
Remote  
Menu Options  
Buttons  
1. During playback, press and hold the Play  
button for longer than 5 seconds.  
ࡗ
 "R-Play" is displayed on the View screen  
and repeated playback begins.  
2. To stop Repeat Playback at any time,  
press the Stop button.  
Notes:  
ࡗ
 Pressing the Play, Rewind, Fast Forward or Pause button also stops Repeat Play.  
ࡗ
 Even though the Counter Memory is turned on, the tape will not stop at the counter  
reading of 00:00:00.  
Page 5-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User and  
Installation Guide  
NEXT-FUNCTION MEMORY  
The Next Function Memory "tells" the recorder what to do immediately after rewinding.  
Before continuing, be sure that the recorder's tape is stopped.  
Front Panel  
Menu Options  
Buttons  
REW  
(a) For Automatic Start of Playback after  
2
Tape Rewind...  
press the Rewind button, then press the  
PLAY  
Play button within 2 seconds.  
REW  
(b)For Automatic Power Off after Tape  
2
Rewind...  
press the Rewind button, then press the  
POWER  
Power button within 2 seconds.  
REW  
(c) For Automatic Eject after Tape Rewind...  
2
press the Rewind button, then press the  
Eject button within 2 seconds.  
8 EJECT  
ࡗ
 This function is not available from the  
remote control.  
Note:  
ࡗ
 If you want the "next function" to automatically start when the counter reads "00:00:00"  
(instead of at the beginning of the tape), turn on the Counter Memory function (see  
Counter Memory on page 5–14).  
Page 5-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
VCR Features  
Recording Features  
5
RECORDING FEATURES  
Various features are provided to make video taping an easy and sure process.  
RECORDING ONE PROGRAM WHILE WATCHING ANOTHER  
To watch a broadcast or cable TV channel while recording another program using the built-  
in VCR, do the following:  
Remote  
Menu Options  
Buttons  
1. During recording, press the TV/VCR button.  
ࡗ
 If you are using the RF connection (see p. 7-22)  
to view the output from your recorder, the  
TV broadcast being recorded disappears.  
ࡗ
 If you are using the AV connection (see p. 7-23)  
to view the output from your recorder, change  
the TV's input mode from AV to TV.  
TV/VCR  
2. Use the TV's channel selector to choose the  
channel you want to watch.  
Notes:  
ࡗ
 If you have connected the recorder to your TV via RF connection and the picture  
being received appears distorted, press the Mode button until the remote is in the SAT  
mode, and then press the TV/VCR button.  
ࡗ
 It is not possible to view one satellite channel while watching another satellite channel.  
DISPLAY ELAPSED RECORDING TIME  
To see the elapsed time of a recording that is taking place, do the following:  
Remote  
Menu Options  
Buttons  
1. Before recording starts, press the Counter  
Reset button.  
RECALL  
ࡗ
 The counter resets to zero and displays the  
exact elapsed time as the tape runs.  
COUNTER RESET  
2. During recording, press the View button  
at any time to see the elapsed time. All  
indications corresponding to the current  
status of the VCR are displayed for  
5 seconds.  
VIEW  
Notes:  
ࡗ
 Make sure that Superimpose is turned on (see Superimpose on p. 5-12).  
ࡗ
 The indications are not recorded.  
Page 5-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User and  
Installation Guide  
STEREO AND SAP (SECOND AUDIO PROGRAM)  
The recorder's built-in MTS decoder enables reception of local broadcasts with Multi-  
channel TV Sound.  
Remote  
Menu Options  
Buttons  
To Record Stereo Programs...  
simply follow the basic recording procedure.  
To Listen To Stereo Soundtrack During  
Recording...  
select "HI-FI" at the VCR Setup screen (see  
Selecting the Soundtrack on page 5-13).  
To Record SAP Programs...  
1. Press the Mode button until the remote is in  
MODE  
MENU  
the SAT mode.  
2. Press the Menu button to open the  
Main Menu.  
3. Select the VCR Setup option.  
8
VCR Setup  
8
4. Press the arrow buttons to move the highlight  
to Second audio in the Options list.  
5. Press the Select button to place a  
checkmark in the checkbox next to Second  
audio. Pressing the Select button again will  
remove the checkmark.  
Second audio  
SELECT  
6. Press the arrow buttons to move the  
Save  
highlight to Save.  
7. Press the Select button to save  
SELECT  
all changes.  
Notes:  
ࡗ
 If an SAP program is received, the SAP audio is recorded on both the Normal and Hi-Fi  
tracks. The main audio program is not recorded.  
ࡗ
 If a non-SAP program is received, the main audio is recorded on both the Hi-Fi and  
Normal audio tracks.  
Page 5-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
VCR Features  
Recording Features  
5
INSTANT TIMER RECORDING (ITR)  
This "on the fly" timer lets you record from 30 minutes to 6 hours (selectable in 30-min.  
increments), and shuts the recorder off after recording is finished. To activate, do the  
following:  
Recorder  
Menu Options  
Buttons  
REC  
1. During recording, press the Rec(ord) button  
q
on the recorder's front panel at any time to  
engage the ITR.  
The recording duration appears on the TV  
screen for approx. 5 seconds.  
ࡗ
 The REC light on the recorder's front panel  
flashes slowly when the ITR function is  
engaged.  
2. If you want to record for more than 30  
minutes, press Rec(ord) again to extend the  
time. Each press extends recording time by  
30 minutes.  
Note:  
ࡗ
 You can only perform ITR using the Rec(ord) button on the recorder's front panel.  
Page 5-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User and  
Installation Guide  
USING CALLER ID  
Your system can display caller identification: the name and telephone number of the caller  
for your incoming telephone calls. However, caller ID only displays information your  
telephone company provides. You may not get all caller IDs, and some callers may block  
caller ID. To set up your system to use caller ID, do the following:  
If you want to activate this feature, you must call your local telephone com-  
pany and subscribe to the caller ID service. Caller ID operates only when both  
the recorder and your TV are turned ON and your recorder is connected to an  
active telephone connection.  
Some telephone calls will not show the caller name and telephone number.  
The caller may have blocked Caller ID, or the call may be from an area that  
does not have the technology.  
Remote  
Menu Options  
Buttons  
1. Press the Mode button until the remote is in  
MODE  
MENU  
SAT mode.  
2. Press the Menu button to open the  
Main Menu.  
3. Select the System Setup option.  
4. Select the Preferences option.  
5. Select the Caller ID option.  
6
5
5
System Setup  
Preferences  
Caller ID  
6
5
5
6. Press the Left arrow button to move the  
highlight to the Enable Caller ID option.  
E
7. Press the Up or Down arrow button to  
select the Enable Caller ID or the  
Disable Caller ID option.  
Enable Caller ID  
Disable Caller ID  
Page 5-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
VCR Features  
Using Caller ID  
5
8. Select the Save option.  
Save  
9. If you have not already done so, call your  
telephone company to activate caller ID.  
When the recorder detects an incoming call, it displays an on-screen message showing the  
caller's name and telephone number.  
ࡗ
 If you receive a telephone call while you are watching a program or using the Browse  
Banner, the recorder displays a message similar to the following at the bottom of your  
TV screen:  
Jane Doe  
303-555-1234  
OK  
ࡗ
 If you receive a telephone call while you are using a menu or the Program Guide, the  
recorder displays a message similar to the following:  
Attention  
Incoming call:  
Name: Jane Doe  
Phone: 303-555-1234  
OK  
To clear either of these messages from your TV screen, press the Select button on the  
remote control, or press the Cancel button. If you wish, you may simply wait a few sec-  
onds for the recorder to remove the message.  
The recorder will not display a Caller ID message on the screen while you are  
recording a program for which you set up a VCR Event Timer. However, it  
will display such a message if you are simply recording a program.  
Page 5-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User and  
Installation Guide  
EVENT TIMERS  
Event timers are a kind of alarm clock, reminding you when a program you want to watch is  
about to start. You may set three types of event timers:  
ࡗ
 VCR Event Timer  
This timer does all of the above, plus it starts the built-in  
VCR recording the event.  
ࡗ
 Auto-Tune Event Timer  
ࡗ
 Reminder Event Timer  
This timer reminds you that the event is about to start,  
and changes the channel to that event when it begins.  
This timer reminds you that the desired event is about to  
start.  
Before you can use a VCR Event Timer, you must do the following:  
Ⅲ
Insert a rewound tape on which you want to record.  
Ⅲ
Use a D-VHS tape if you wish to make a bit stream (D-VHS) recording of  
a program. Using a regular VHS tape will automatically record the  
program in the analog VHS mode.  
If an event time changes by more than twenty-four hours from the  
originally scheduled time, the event timer does not execute.  
In general, you cannot set an Event Timer for a program on channels 000  
through 099. Channel 000 is reserved for input from another auxiliary device.  
Channels 001 through 099 are reserved for your local broadcast or cable  
stations. The title, start and end times for programs on these stations are  
usually not available; this is why the Program Guide displays only the words  
"Local Programming."  
However, suppose you add broadcast channels to the Program Guide, assign  
these channels to a channel number between 001 and 099, and assign them an  
ABC, CBS, or NBC network affiliation. The Program Guide then  
automatically displays "prime time" program information for the networks. In  
this case, you can set an Event Timer for a program on one of these channels.  
Page 5-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
VCR Features  
Event Timers  
5
Note: In this section, "event" means a program such as a TV show, movie, sports event, or  
pay per view program.  
Three minutes before an event timer is to execute, the recorder  
displays a small blinking icon on your TV screen to remind you  
that an event timer is scheduled to begin. This icon is displayed  
only until the event begins.  
While the icon is displayed, you may do the following:  
ࡗ
 Press the Cancel button to clear the icon from the TV screen (this does not affect the  
timer—it still executes), or  
ࡗ
 Press the Info button to display more information about the scheduled event timer. The  
recorder displays a screen showing the title, the time, and the channel of the event. You  
will have the following choices:  
Ⅲ
Continue with the event timer (the timer will execute as scheduled),  
or  
Ⅲ
Stop the event timer.  
Note: This stops only this occurrence of a Mon-Fri, Daily or Weekly timer.  
The timer still executes the next time it is scheduled. To stop all executions of a  
Mon-Fri, Daily or Weekly timer, you must delete the timer (see Deleting an Event  
Timer on page 5-29). For a Reminder Event Timer, instead of having the option to  
stop the timer you have the option to tune to the channel of the event.  
or  
Ⅲ
If you do not respond to the screen, it disappears within a few seconds.  
Page 5-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User and  
Installation Guide  
CREATE AN EVENT TIMER  
You can set the recorder's timer to automatically record a program by choosing the program  
through the Browse Banner, Program Guide screen, or Theme Categories screen.  
Remote  
Menu Options  
Buttons  
Load a cassette into the cassette loading slot.  
ࡗ
 Make sure the record safety tab is intact.  
ࡗ
 If the tab is missing, cover the hole with  
adhesive tape before inserting the cassette.  
To choose through the Browse Banner...  
1. Select the desired program using one of the  
procedures in Changing Channels via The  
Browse Banner on page 4-5. Go to step 2.  
To choose through the Program Guide...  
1. Select the desired program using one of the  
procedures in Changing Channels via The  
Program Guide on page 4-9. Go to step 2.  
To choose through the Theme Categories screen...  
1. Select the desired program using one of the  
procedures in Selecting a Program in the  
Themes List on page 4-12. Go to step 2.  
Note: This program cannot be running currently  
— it must begin sometime in the future.  
2. Press the Select button to display the  
SELECT  
Create an Event Timer menu.  
3. Press the Left arrow button to move the  
highlight to the VCR option.  
E
4. Press the Up or Down arrow button to  
Timer Type  
highlight the desired type of event timer  
(VCR, Auto-Tune, or Reminder).  
Then press the Select button.  
VCR  
Auto-Tune  
Reminder  
SELECT  
Page 5-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
VCR Features  
Event Timers  
5
5. Press the Up or Down arrow button to  
highlight the desired timer frequency.  
Next press the Select button and then  
press the Right arrow button.  
Timer Frequency  
Once  
Weekly  
Daily  
6. Press the Up or Down arrow button to  
select "Mode". Then press the Select  
button.  
Mon-Fri  
SELECT  
Mode  
ࡗ
 Select "D-VHS" when recording a  
satellite broadcast on a D-VHS tape.  
ࡗ
 Select "SP" or "EP" when recording a  
satellite broadcast on a VHS tape  
(analog) or when recording local  
channels.  
D-VHS  
SP  
EP  
W
7. Press the Select button to put a checkmark  
in the checkbox next to "Start 1min. early"  
if you want to begin recording one minute  
prior to the program's scheduled starting  
time. (Pressing the Select button will  
remove the checkmark.) Then press the  
Right arrow button.  
Start 1min. early  
8. Either: Select the Create option to save  
Create  
the event timer.  
Note: Pressing the Info button will display  
the program's contents and the timer icon  
.
or  
If you want to return to the previous menu  
without creating an event timer, press the  
Cancel button.  
POWER  
9. Press the Power button to turn the  
recorder off. The TIMER light on the  
recorder's front panel will illuminate.  
Page 5-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User and  
Installation Guide  
CREATE A MANUAL EVENT TIMER  
To program the recorder's built-in timer manually, do the following:  
Remote  
Buttons  
Menu Options  
1. Press the Mode button until the remote is in  
MODE  
the SAT mode.  
2. Load a cassette into the cassette loading slot.  
ࡗ
 Make sure the record safety tab is intact.  
ࡗ
 If the tab is missing, cover the hole with  
adhesive tape before inserting the cassette.  
3. Press the Menu button to open the  
Main Menu.  
MENU  
4. Highlight the Timers option and press Select.  
The Event Timer Management screen will be  
displayed.  
7
Timers  
7
5. Press the Up or Down arrow button to  
highlight the Create option. Then press  
the Select button. The Create a Manual  
Event Timer screen will be displayed.  
6. Press the arrow buttons to highlight the  
desired type of event timer (VCR,  
Auto-Tune, or Reminder). Then press  
the Select button.  
Type  
SELECT  
VCR  
Auto-Tune  
Reminder  
7. Press the Up or Down arrow button to  
highlight the desired timer frequency.  
Next press the Select button and then  
press the Right arrow button.  
Frequency  
Once  
Weekly  
Daily  
Mon-Fri  
SELECT  
W
Page 5-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
VCR Features  
Event Timers  
5
8. Press the Up or Down arrow button or  
number buttons to select the desired  
channel. Next press the Select button  
and then press the Down arrow button.  
Channel  
AUXIN-0  
CBS-4  
ABC-7  
NBC-9  
SELECT  
9. Press the Left or Right arrow button to  
select "Mode". Then press the Select  
button.  
Mode  
SP  
D-VHS  
EP  
ࡗ
 Select "D-VHS" when recording a  
satellite broadcast on a D-VHS tape.  
ࡗ
 Select "SP" or "EP" when recording a  
satellite broadcast on a VHS tape  
(analog) or when recording local channels.  
SELECT  
SELECT  
10.Press the arrow buttons to select "Set  
Date/Time", and then press the Select  
button. The Set Date/Time For Manual  
Timer screen will be displayed.  
Set Date/Time  
Start Time:Hr./Min.  
11.After pressing the Left arrow button, press  
the number buttons to set the Start Time.  
(To input a one-digit number, be sure to  
insert a zero first.)  
AM  
PM  
1 0 : 0 0  
E
12.Press the Up or Down arrow button to  
select AM or PM, and then press the  
Select button.  
SELECT  
13.Press the arrow buttons to highlight End  
Time, and set the End Time using the  
number buttons. (To input a one-digit  
number, be sure to insert a zero first.)  
14.Press the Up or Down arrow button to  
select AM or PM, and press the Select  
button. Then press the Right arrow button.  
End Time:Hr./Min.  
1 1 : 0 0  
AM  
PM  
SELECT  
W
Page 5-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User and  
Installation Guide  
15.Press the number buttons to input the date  
under Mo./Day.  
ࡗ
 To input a one-digit number, be sure to  
insert a zero first.  
Date:Mo./Day  
06/27  
ࡗ
 Step 15 not necessary if you selected  
"Mon-Fri" or "Daily" in step 7.  
ࡗ
 If you selected "Weekly" in step 7, press the  
Up or Down arrow button to select the Day,  
and press the Select button.  
16.Either: Select the Create Timer option to  
save the event timer, and press the Select  
button. The Event Timer Management  
screen will be displayed. To program two or  
more event timers, repeat steps 5 through 16.  
Create Timer  
SELECT  
or  
If you want to return to the previous menu  
without creating an event timer, press the  
Cancel button.  
17.Press the Power button to turn the recorder  
off. The TIMER light on the recorder's  
front panel will illuminate.  
POWER  
Page 5-28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
VCR Features  
Event Timers  
5
SCHEDULING CONFLICTS  
If you try to create event timers for overlapping events, the recorder displays a menu that  
says, "WARNING: Event Timer Scheduling Conflict," and shows the dates and times of  
both events. The recorder also displays this menu if an event time has changed, causing the  
event timer to overlap a previously created event timer. You must delete one of the sched-  
uled event timers to resolve the conflict.  
DELETING A CONFLICTING EVENT TIMER  
Remote  
Menu Options  
Buttons  
1. In the Event Timer Scheduling Conflict  
Delete This Timer  
menu, press the Up or Down arrow button  
to highlight the Delete This Timer option  
that corresponds to the event timer you  
want to delete.  
2. Press the Select button.  
SELECT  
MAXIMUM NUMBER OF EVENT TIMERS ALLOWED  
The system allows you to create a maximum number of event timers. If you try to create  
more than that number of event timers, the recorder displays a menu giving you the option  
to delete a previously set up event timer first.  
Note: Once (one-time only) event timers are deleted automatically when they execute.  
You must manually delete all other types of event timers.  
DELETING AN EVENT TIMER  
Remote  
Menu Options  
Buttons  
MODE  
1. Press the Mode button until the remote is in  
SAT mode.  
MENU  
2. Press the Menu button to open the  
Main Menu.  
Page 5-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User and  
Installation Guide  
3. Select the Timers option. The Event Timer  
Management screen will be displayed.  
7
Timers  
7
Event Timer Management  
Active Event Timers  
Cancel  
Delete  
Create  
Edit  
4/26 once  
M-F  
7:00a  
HBO  
VCR  
Reminder  
12:00p CNN  
Wed Weekly 7:30p  
Daily 5:00a  
ESPN2 Auto-Tune  
SHOW VCR  
Help  
4. Press the Left arrow button to highlight the  
first event timer in the event timers list.  
E
5. Press the Up or Down arrow button to  
highlight the event timer that you want  
to delete.  
6. Press the Select button. A check mark  
SELECT  
appears in the box next to the event timer.  
7. If you want to delete more than one event  
timer, repeat steps 5 and 6 for each event  
timer that you want to delete.  
8. Press the Right arrow button, then the  
Up or Down arrow button to highlight  
the Delete option.  
Delete  
W
9. Either: Press the Select button to delete  
SELECT  
the event timer(s),  
or  
To return to the Main Menu without  
deleting any event timers, press the  
Cancel button.  
Page 5-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
VCR Features  
Event Timers  
5
TO MAKE CHANGES AFTER SETTING EVENT TIMERS  
To make changes after you have set event timers, do the following:  
Remote  
Buttons  
Menu Options  
1. Perform steps 1 - 6 of Deleting an Event  
Timer described on page 5-29 and 5-30.  
2. Press the Right arrow button, then the  
Up or Down arrow button to highlight  
Edit  
W
the Edit option.  
3. Press the Select button. The Edit a  
SELECT  
Manual Event Timer screen will be  
displayed.  
4. When you want to change Type/  
Frequency/Channel/Mode, change it  
using the arrow buttons.  
5. Press the arrow buttons to select  
SELECT  
"Set Date/Time", and then press the  
Select button. The Set Date/Time For  
Manual Timer screen will be displayed.  
6. Press the arrow buttons to highlight the  
item you wish to change.  
7. Use the number buttons to change the  
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
Start Time/Stop Time/Date. To change  
AM or PM, make sure your selection  
with the Up or Down arrow button and  
then press the Select button.  
Page 5-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User and  
Installation Guide  
8. Select the Create Timer option to save the  
event timer, and press the Select button.  
Create Timer  
SELECT  
9. Press the Power button to turn the  
recorder off. The TIMER light on the  
recorder's front panel will illuminate.  
POWER  
REVIEWING EVENT TIMERS  
You can display a list of scheduled event timers at any time, using the Event Timer  
Management menu. Or, use this menu to delete event timers. To open the Event Timer  
Management menu, do the following:  
Remote  
Menu Options  
Buttons  
1. Press the Mode button until the remote is in  
MODE  
SAT mode.  
2. Press the Menu button to open the  
Main Menu.  
MENU  
3. Select the Timers option.  
7
Timers  
7
RESTRICTED PROGRAMS AND EVENT TIMERS  
You must enter the system password before you can create a timer for a locked program, and  
order a pay per view program before you can create a timer for it. If you do not, or if the  
program is blacked out in your area, when the timer executes the recorder may display an  
error message instead of the program.  
POWER OFF AND EVENT TIMERS  
If your recorder is OFF at the time an Auto-Tune or VCR Event Timer is scheduled to execute,  
the timer turns the recorder ON. Once the event has ended, your recorder powers OFF (unless  
you pressed any remote or recorder buttons during the time that the timer was active).  
If your recorder is OFF at the time a Reminder Event Timer is scheduled to execute, the  
timer turns the recorder ON and tunes it to the channel you last viewed. The recorder then  
briefly displays the reminder screen.  
Page 5-32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
VCR Features  
Editing to or from Another VCR  
5
EDITING TO OR FROM ANOTHER VCR  
You can use the recorder as the playback unit or the recording unit to edit from VHS to VHS.  
It is also possible to use the recorder as the playback unit to edit from D-VHS to VHS. It is  
not possible to edit from D-VHS to D-VHS by connecting to an external D-VHS recorder.  
To make an edited VHS tape, do the following:  
Remote  
Menu Options  
Buttons  
1. Connect the playback unit's VIDEO OUT  
and AUDIO OUT connectors to the  
recording unit's VIDEO IN and AUDIO IN  
connectors using the supplied Audio/Video  
cable.  
ࡗ
 If using another VCR with an S-VIDEO  
input connector, it is recommended to use  
the S-VIDEO connection to minimize  
picture degradation while editing.  
ࡗ
 When using the recorder as the recording  
unit and a monaural VCR as the playback  
unit, connect the VCR's AUDIO OUT  
connector to the AUDIO IN L connector  
on the recorder.  
2. Load the cassette to be played into the  
playback unit, and load the cassette to be  
recorded into the recording unit.  
3. Set the recording unit's input mode to  
AUX.  
ࡗ
 With this recorder, press the number  
button "000". "AUX" will appear in the  
on-screen display instead of a channel  
number.  
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
ࡗ
 Select the SP or EP tape speed  
(see page 5-5).  
4. Start tape playback on the playback unit.  
ࡗ
 If you do not want superimposed  
on-screen characters and symbols from  
the playback unit to be recorded onto  
the edited tape, turn its superimpose  
function off (if allowed by the playback  
unit).  
5. Start recording on the recording unit.  
Page 5-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User and  
Installation Guide  
EDITING FROM A CAMCORDER  
You can use a camcorder as the playback unit and the recorder as the recording unit to edit  
rough footage into personal videos. Do the following:  
Remote  
Menu Options  
Buttons  
1. Connect the camcorder's VIDEO OUT and  
AUDIO OUT connectors to the recorder's  
VIDEO IN and AUDIO IN connectors  
using the supplied Audio/Video cable.  
ࡗ
 If using a monaural camcorder, connect  
its AUDIO OUT connector to the  
AUDIO IN L connector on the recorder.  
2. Load the cassette to be played into the  
camcorder, and load the cassette to be  
recorded into the recorder.  
3. Set the recorder's input mode to AUX  
by pressing the number button "000".  
"AUX" will appear in the on-screen  
display instead of a channel number.  
ࡗ
 Select the SP or EP tape speed  
(see page 5-5).  
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
4. Start tape playback at the camcorder.  
ࡗ
 If you do not want superimposed  
on-screen characters and symbols from  
the camcorder to be recorded onto the  
edited tape, turn its superimpose  
function off (if allowed by the  
camcorder).  
5. Start recording on the recorder.  
Page 5-34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Starting Your  
Installation  
6
INTRODUCTION  
FOR MORE INFORMATION:  
If you do not want to install your system yourself, you can have it installed by a professional.  
Call the DISH Network Service Center at 1-800-799-7175 for information about installation  
in your area.  
If you do intend to install your system yourself, this chapter provides installation procedures.  
The procedures are relatively simple, but do require some skill in construction-related tasks.  
Make sure to follow all warnings and cautions; they are provided for your safety.  
An optional Installation Kit is available. This Kit includes typical hardware used during  
installation, an instructional videotape, and a more detailed Installation Kit Guide. See  
Optional Installation Kit on page 6-7 for a list of the contents of this kit.  
You should be somewhat familiar with construction related tasks, as the  
following installation instructions do not contain step-by-step procedures for  
mounting the antenna to a surface and drilling holes in the building for cable.  
The optional Installation Kit provides such detailed instructions. You may also  
choose to have a licensed professional perform the installation.  
It is very important that you carefully follow all local building and electrical  
codes (especially the latest revision of the National Electrical Code) and  
standard safety procedures for installing and working with this type of equip-  
ment. Improper procedures or installation can result in damage to the equip-  
ment or the building, and injury or death to you. If you are not sure about  
whether your installation follows these codes, contact a licensed building  
inspector or electrician in your area for assistance.  
Take extreme care to avoid contacting any overhead power lines, lights, and  
power circuits while you are installing the satellite antenna. Contact with any  
of these could prove fatal. Do not install the satellite antenna near power lines.  
See the Important Product Safety Instructions on page ii for more information.  
Page 6-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User and  
Installation Guide  
SUMMARY OF INSTALLATION  
Following is a summary of the procedures to install and set up your system.  
Perform the procedures in the order presented.  
1. Unpack the satellite antenna*, recorder, and parts (see pages 6–3 through 6–5) and the  
optional installation kit, if you purchased one (see page 6–7).  
*Supplied with HM-DSR100DU. Sold separately for HM-DSR100RU.  
2. Review "What You Need" (see pages 6–6 through 6–8). Connect the recorder to your  
TV set.  
3. Determine the approximate location of the satellites (see pages 6–9 through 6–12).  
4. Find the best location on your property, with a clear line of sight to the satellites, for the  
satellite antenna (see pages 6–13 through 6–19).  
5. Assemble the satellite antenna and attach it to a solid surface (see pages 7–1 through  
7–7).  
6. Ground the satellite antenna, and wire it to the recorder (see pages 7–8 through 7–11).  
7. Aim the satellite antenna for the strongest possible signal (see pages 7–12 through  
7–14).  
8. Connect the recorder to an active telephone connection (see pages 7–15 through 7–16).  
With the recorder wired to the TV and the antenna properly installed, you will be able  
to see the Preview Channel, which tells you about available programs, channels, and  
services.  
9. Order your programming by calling the Service Center (see page 7–17).  
When the services are authorized, you will see channels other than the Preview Channel.  
10. Wire the recorder to your other electronic equipment (see pages 7–18 through 7–24).  
11. Program the remote control to control the recorder and your other electronic equipment  
(see pages 4–39 through 4–43).  
12. Customize your system. See Local TV Link on page 3–13, Favorites Lists on page  
4–14, Security Features on page 4-19.  
Page 6-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Starting Your Installation  
Before You Start Installation  
6
BEFORE YOU START INSTALLATION  
UNPACKING AND CHECKING CONTENTS  
As you unpack the system, confirm that all the parts are included. See Package Contents  
below for a list of the included components.  
Note: Keep the shipping materials in which these items are packed, in case you ever need  
to return them.  
Unpack the contents carefully. Electronic equipment can be easily damaged if bumped or  
handled roughly. Examine all parts for damage that may have occurred during shipment. If  
you find any damage, immediately call the location where your system was purchased, or  
the Service Center, before continuing with installation.  
PACKAGE CONTENTS  
ࡗ
 User and Installation Guide  
ࡗ
 Satellite antenna assembly (this includes the LNBF, the support arm, the dish, the  
mounting bracket, the mast, and related hardware; see Components of the Satellite  
Antenna on page 6-4, supplied with HM-DSR100DU)  
ࡗ
 Recorder with built-in receiver  
ࡗ
 Remote control, with four (4) AAA batteries packaged separately  
ࡗ
 Cables:  
Ⅲ
Ⅲ
Ⅲ
25 foot RJ-11 telephone cable  
8 foot phono (RCA) 3-connector cord  
6 foot RF or VHF cable  
ࡗ
 Ultra-high frequency (UHF) antenna for UHF remote  
Note: Additional hardware is required for installation. See What You Need on page 6-6.  
An optional Installation Kit is available, which includes many of these items.  
See Optional Installation Kit on page 6-7. Contact the location where your system was  
purchased for more information, or call the Service Center for the location of a licensed  
dealer near you.  
Page 6-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User and  
Installation Guide  
COMPONENTS OF THE SATELLITE ANTENNA  
Note: The following pictures are not to scale.  
The fully assembled satellite antenna looks like this.  
Following are descriptions of each piece of the satellite  
antenna.  
LNBF (LOW NOISE BLOCK DOWNCONVERTER WITH INTEGRATED FEEDHORN)  
The "dish" focuses the signals transmitted from the satellites onto the LNBF. The LNBF  
amplifies the signals, converts the whole "block," or range of signals to a lower frequency,  
and "feeds" the signals into the coaxial cable(s) connected to your recorder(s).  
LNBF - SINGLE OUTPUT  
If you purchased the single-output LNBF to use with the  
recorder, your package contains this LNBF. Note that this  
LNBF has only one coaxial cable connection.  
LNBF - DUAL OUTPUT  
The dual output LNBF supplied with the HM-DSR100DU and  
be used with more than one receiver. Note that this LNBF has  
two coaxial cable connections.  
LNBF SUPPORT ARM  
The LNBF support arm attaches the LNBF and the dish to the  
mast assembly.  
Page 6-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Starting Your Installation  
Components of the Satellite Antenna  
6
DISH  
The dish reflects and focuses the signals from the satellites onto  
the LNBF.  
Flathead bolts with nuts attach the dish to the support arm  
bracket.  
LNBF SCREW AND WASHER  
The LNBF screw and washer attach the LNBF to the end of the  
support arm.  
CABLE CLIP (OPTIONAL)  
The cable clip holds the coaxial cable(s) to the top of the  
support arm bracket.  
MOUNTING BRACKET AND MAST ASSEMBLY  
The mast assembly attaches the support arm (which holds the  
dish and the LNBF) to the mounting surface.  
Note: If you are planning to use a pole to mount the satellite  
antenna, you will not need the mast assembly. In this case, the  
pole (instead of the mast) fits into the support arm bracket.  
However, you should keep the mast assembly in case you  
decide to relocate the satellite antenna.  
Page 6-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User and  
Installation Guide  
WHAT YOU NEED  
WHAT YOU NEED TO KNOW  
Because you will make modifications to the location where you mount the satellite antenna,  
you should be somewhat familiar with and be able to safely perform the following procedures.  
ࡗ
 You should be able to use a plumb line or level to set both horizontal and vertical sur-  
faces. This is especially critical for vertical surfaces.  
ࡗ
 You should know how to drill holes in the mounting surface (whether wood, brick,  
cinder block, etc.).  
ࡗ
 You should know how to drill holes and run cabling through your building. This  
includes sealing the holes once the cable has been installed.  
WHAT YOU NEED TO HAVE  
You will need the following items to install your system properly and take full advantage of  
the available features.  
Note: Items marked with an asterisk (*) are included in the optional Installation Kit. For  
the complete list of Installation Kit contents, see page 6-7.  
ࡗ
 8' triple phono (RCA) audio/video cord *  
ࡗ
 Copper-clad grounding rod - at least eight feet in length  
ࡗ
 Grounding rod clamp  
ࡗ
 Dual grounding block *  
ࡗ
 30' Grounding wire, either 8 gauge aluminum or 10 gauge copper *  
ࡗ
 2 RG-6 (coaxial) cables with "F" connectors (These cables should be sealed at the  
connector and suitable for outdoor use. One cable should reach from the satellite  
antenna LNBF to the grounding block, and the other cable should reach from the  
grounding block to the recorder). *  
ࡗ
 75' RG-6 (coaxial) cable with "F" connectors  
ࡗ
 4 Lag screws (3" x 5/16"); 4 Lag screws (2" x 5/16") *  
ࡗ
 4 Cable ties; 10 Cable clips for the coaxial cable *  
ࡗ
 Screwdrivers: Phillips and flathead  
ࡗ
 Ladder (if necessary)  
Page 6-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Starting Your Installation  
Optional Installation Kit  
6
ࡗ
 Sledgehammer or small fence post driver  
ࡗ
 Drill and 1/2 inch drill bit - long enough to drill through the exterior wall of your building  
ࡗ
 Compass *  
ࡗ
 Silicone sealant (for sealing drill holes) *  
Note: You will need additional tools and materials, depending on the type of surface on  
which you mount the antenna. Each of the procedures for mounting the antenna lists these.  
If you find that you do not have the tools and skills for a certain procedure, call a profes-  
sional, such as a satellite television dealer or an electrician, for assistance.  
OPTIONAL INSTALLATION KIT  
The Installation Kit (VU73457) is an optional product that contains the hardware and  
materials that you would typically use to install the system. To buy the Installation Kit,  
contact the location where your system was purchased or call the Service Center.  
If you did not purchase the Installation Kit, but still plan to install your system yourself, you  
should gather the appropriate materials (such as those listed below) before beginning instal-  
lation. The Installation Kit contains the following:  
ࡗ
 Installation Kit Guide  
ࡗ
 Installation video tape with step-by-step demonstrations  
ࡗ
 25' telephone cord with RJ-11 connectors  
ࡗ
 Dual telephone adapter  
ࡗ
 Telephone coupler, for connecting two telephone cords  
ࡗ
 8' Triple phono (RCA) audio/video cord  
ࡗ
 Dual grounding block  
ࡗ
 30' Grounding wire, either 8 gauge aluminum or 10 gauge copper  
ࡗ
 25' RG-6 (coaxial) cable with "F" connectors  
ࡗ
 75' RG-6 (coaxial) cable with "F" connectors  
ࡗ
 4 Toggle anchors (3" x 1/4"); 4 Double expansion anchors  
ࡗ
 4 Machine bolts (3" x 1/4")  
ࡗ
 4 Lag screws (3" x 5/16"); 4 Lag screws (2" x 5/16")  
ࡗ
 4 Cable ties; 10 Cable clips for the coaxial cable  
Page 6-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User and  
Installation Guide  
ࡗ
 Compass  
ࡗ
 Silicone sealant  
Tools, such as drills or screwdrivers, are not included in the Installation Kit.  
INSTALLING BATTERIES IN THE REMOTE  
Four AAA batteries, packaged separately, are included with the remote control. See Installing  
Batteries in the Remote on page 3-1 for this procedure.  
SETTING THE REMOTE ADDRESS  
When you get your recorder and remote, they are addressed to 1. Unless you experience  
problems, you do not need to change the address at this time. If you want to change the  
address, change it to a different number.  
You may need to set the remote address in any of the following situations:  
ࡗ
 You have a UHF remote, and you encounter interference caused by other nearby UHF  
remotes (for example, a neighbor's UHF remote or a UHF remote being used in another  
room of your building).  
ࡗ
 There is another satellite receiver and remote being used in the vicinity.  
Note: In either of the above situations, you may need to assign an address to your  
remote and recorder, so that the recorder responds only to that remote.  
ࡗ
 Your recorder does not respond to the remote. You must match the addresses to be able  
to use the remote. In this case, it could be that the remote and recorder are set to differ-  
ent addresses. See Setting the Remote Address on page 3-2 for this procedure.  
TEMPORARILY CONNECTING THE RECORDER TO TV  
You must connect the recorder to your TV and make sure the Smart Card is installed to get  
the information to aim your satellite antenna. In this step, it is not necessary to fully wire  
your recorder to all your electronic equipment.  
See Wiring Setups on page 7-21 for suggested wiring configurations. The Quick Install on  
page 7-22 is the quickest and easiest to set up.  
Page 6-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Starting Your Installation  
Finding the Satellites  
6
FINDING THE SATELLITES  
Before you can decide on the mounting location for the antenna, you must determine the  
approximate location of the satellites. Then you must find a mounting site that provides an  
unobstructed signal path from the satellites to the antenna.  
WHAT YOU WILL NEED  
ࡗ
 Compass  
ࡗ
 Recorder with built-in satellite receiver, connected to a TV  
DETERMINING THE DIRECTION TO THE SATELLITES  
You must determine the direction to the satellites from your location, to help you determine  
where to mount the antenna. You must have a clear line of sight from the antenna location  
to the satellites. Use the following procedure to find the best location for the antenna, while  
keeping in mind the considerations discussed in Discussion of Potential Mounting Sites on  
page 6-13.  
After you finish mounting the antenna, you must aim the dish to get the strongest signal.  
See Aiming the Antenna for the Strongest Signal on page 7-12 for this procedure.  
WHERE ARE THEY?  
You must know where the satellites are to choose a good location to mount the antenna. The  
satellites orbit the Earth together, over the equator. For everyone in the United States, this  
means that the satellites are south of your location.  
The satellites are approximately 22,300 miles up from the surface of the Earth. They are in  
what is called a "geosynchronous orbit." This means that the satellites stay aligned over  
one place on the surface of the Earth. If you could see them, they would seem to hang in  
one spot in the sky.  
Because the satellites do not move in relation to the surface of the Earth, it is easy to main-  
tain the signal. Once you aim the antenna at the satellites, you will not have to reposition  
the antenna to follow the satellites.  
The satellites are located over the equator, due south of Reno, Nevada, at 119˚ West.  
Page 6-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User and  
Installation Guide  
FINDING THE DIRECTION AND ELEVATION  
When determining the approximate location of the satellites, you need to find the azimuth (South,  
Southeast, or Southwest direction to the satellites) and elevation (angle up to the satellites) from  
your location. "Azimuth" is also called "direction." This Guide uses the term "direction".  
Finding the satellites is easy. You first need to connect the recorder to your TV, and turn on  
the recorder and TV. Tune your TV to channel 3 or 4. See Wiring Setups on page 7-21 for  
more information.  
Use the Point Dish and Signal Strength menu to find the direction and elevation of the  
satellites from your location. After you complete the installation of the satellite antenna,  
you can then fine-tune the aiming of your satellite antenna to receive the strongest signal.  
To open the Point Dish and Signal Strength menu, do the following.  
Remote  
Menu Options  
Buttons  
1. Press the Mode button to set the recorder  
MODE  
MENU  
to the SAT mode.  
2. Press the Menu button to open the  
Main Menu.  
3. Select the System Setup option.  
4. Select the Installation option.  
6
1
System Setup  
Installation  
6
1
1
5. Select the Point Dish and Signal  
Strength option.  
1 Point Dish/Signal  
6. Use the arrow buttons to highlight the  
ZIP Code field. Use the number pad  
buttons to enter each digit of your  
ZIP code.  
Example  
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
ZIP Code  
80155  
Example  
7. As soon as you enter the last digit of your ZIP  
code, the recorder displays the direction  
(azimuth) and elevation on the menu. Write  
down these numbers and go on to the next  
section.  
Azimuth Angle: 191  
Elevation Angle: 42  
Direction or  
Azimuth :__________  
Elevation:__________  
Page 6-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Starting Your Installation  
Finding the Satellites  
6
FINDING A CLEAR LINE OF SIGHT  
"Finding a clear line of sight" means finding a location for the satellite antenna so that its  
view of the orbiting satellites is unobstructed by trees, buildings, or any other obstructions.  
This includes making sure that sapling trees are not likely to grow up or out into the line of  
sight. Also, consider seasonal changes. An unobstructed site in winter may be obstructed by  
foliage in spring and summer.  
1. Take a compass and the direction and elevation  
numbers to your planned location for the satellite  
antenna.  
Make sure the compass is at least a foot away from  
other metal objects, and that there are no magnetic  
objects or electronic devices nearby. Holding the  
compass so the needle can swing freely, turn the  
compass until the dark end of the compass needle is  
aligned on the N. This points to magnetic North.  
The compass face is divided into 360 degrees.  
From your location, North is zero degrees (0˚),  
East is 90˚, South is 180˚, and West is 270˚.  
2. On the compass, find the direction number  
provided by the Point Dish and Signal Strength  
menu. Turn to face this number, while keeping  
the dark end of the needle over the N. This is the  
direction to the satellites. Find a landmark, or lay  
a stick or board on the ground that lines up in that  
direction.  
Page 6-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User and  
Installation Guide  
3. Use the elevation number to find out how high the  
satellites are in the sky from your location. You  
know that vertical is 90°, and horizontal 0°, and  
halfway in between is 45°.  
Stand close to where you plan to mount the  
satellite antenna and face in the direction that you  
marked for the direction to the satellites. Using  
the elevation angle, find the closest approximation  
to that angle in the sky. You now are pointing to  
the approximate location of the satellites.  
4. Note whether there are any obstructions between  
you and the satellites. Leave a wide margin for  
adjustment, since you have not yet aimed the  
antenna exactly.  
If there are obstructions, you will have to find a  
new location, or remove the obstruction, if pos-  
sible.  
Also, make sure that the antenna is accessible for  
removing snow and other debris. If necessary,  
repeat steps 1 through 4 until you have located the  
best location for the antenna. The best location  
should provide a sturdy support for the antenna,  
plus it must have a clear line of sight. It should  
also be easily accessible. Mark the spot and the  
direction to the satellites.  
Page 6-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Starting Your Installation  
Discussion of Potential Mounting Sites  
6
DISCUSSION OF POTENTIAL MOUNTING SITES  
When you are surveying your property for appropriate sites for the satellite antenna, keep in  
mind that you can mount the satellite antenna on a variety of surfaces: brick, cinder block,  
wood, some sidings, rooftop, or a pole.  
Since installing the satellite antenna may involve drilling into the wall or roof of your  
building, or digging a hole and using cement, you should be very confident of the location  
before beginning installation. Errors can be expensive and time-consuming.  
The following guidelines apply to all mounting surfaces and locations.  
WEATHER AND WIND CONSIDERATIONS  
The satellite antenna can withstand most kinds of weather. However, extremely strong  
winds could damage the base on which the satellite antenna is mounted.  
A strong wind can cause the satellite antenna to exert several hundred pounds of pressure on  
the mounting surface, so the surface must be stable and strong. Such a mounting surface  
also helps ensure against movement of the satellite antenna, which would interfere with  
signal reception. In general, the stronger the signal you maintain, the better the reception  
during snow, rain, and heavy cloud cover.  
DO’S  
You should always follow these instructions to help ensure against injury to  
yourself and damage to your equipment or mounting surface. See Important  
Product Safety Instructions on page ii for further safety instructions.  
ࡗ
 Assemble the satellite antenna in a safe location before climbing up to the mounting  
location. Use caution when climbing, and when working at the mounting location.  
ࡗ
 Install the satellite antenna only on a solid surface such as cinder block, brick, or solid  
foundation material. If you install it on the side of a building, make sure to attach the  
bolts directly to a building stud or other solid material. Use the appropriate drilling and  
attachment hardware for the surface.  
ࡗ
 Make sure you have determined the best location for the satellite antenna before drilling  
the holes in your building or setting up the mounting pole. Mistakes can be costly.  
ࡗ
 All installations should conform to your local building and electrical codes. If you are  
not sure, contact a licensed building inspector or electrician in your area to assist you.  
Be aware that community covenants, if any, may have additional requirements.  
ࡗ
 Choose a site that is easily accessible in most weather conditions. You may need to  
clean snow or debris off the satellite antenna.  
Page 6-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User and  
Installation Guide  
ࡗ
 Place the satellite antenna as close to the recorder as possible. Use no more than 100  
feet of cable between the recorder and the satellite antenna, unless you install a line  
amplifier to boost the signal. Otherwise, the system is more likely to lose the signal  
during periods of rain, snow, or heavy cloud cover.  
ࡗ
 Consider seasonal changes. The site may appear unobstructed in the winter, but spring  
and summer foliage could block the signal to the satellite antenna.  
DO NOT’S  
You should always follow these instructions to help ensure against injury  
to yourself and damage to your equipment or mounting surface. See  
Important Product Safety Instructions on page ii for further safety instructions.  
ࡗ
 Never install the satellite antenna near power lines.  
ࡗ
 Do not install the satellite antenna where it can be jostled, bumped, or blocked by  
people, animals, or vehicles.  
ࡗ
 Do not install the satellite antenna where it is exposed to high winds. Do not try to  
install the satellite antenna in windy or stormy weather, particularly if there is a chance  
of lightning.  
ࡗ
 Do not attempt to fasten the satellite antenna to the mortar between bricks or cinder  
blocks.  
ࡗ
 Do not mount the satellite antenna on vinyl or aluminum siding. These materials are  
structurally too weak to securely hold the satellite antenna, even with a building stud  
underneath. The siding would have to be crushed, or the forces of wind and weather  
over time would crush the area under the foot of the antenna mast.  
ࡗ
 Do not mount the satellite antenna downwind of a chimney or furnace vent. Ashes and  
dirt could collect on the dish and LNBF, possibly causing damage and poor reception. If  
practical, locate the antenna so the dish faces away from the vent.  
ࡗ
 Do not install the satellite antenna on stucco or imitation masonry unless the base  
material is solid. Do not mount the satellite antenna on composite materials such as  
strand, chip, fiber, or particle board unless the fastener attaches securely to a wall stud,  
rafter, or other foundation material beneath the surface.  
ࡗ
 Do not mount the satellite antenna on a railing, on a tile roof, or in a tree.  
Page 6-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Starting Your Installation  
Discussion of Potential Mounting Sites  
6
MOUNTING THE ANTENNA ON BRICK  
Materials Required  
Tools Required  
ࡗ
 4 wall anchors, 1/4”  
ࡗ
 drill  
ࡗ
 4 machine bolts, 1/4” x 3”  
ࡗ
 1/2” masonry drill bit  
ࡗ
 7/16” socket or box-end  
wrench  
ࡗ
 bubble level or plumb line  
ࡗ
 pencil  
"Brick" is defined as a solid brick wall or other structure. This does not  
include brick facing that is used on some buildings over the main structure. If  
you are mounting the satellite antenna on brick facing, see Mounting the  
Antenna on Siding on page 6-16.  
You can mount the satellite antenna on a  
solid brick wall.  
ࡗ
 The surface must be flat and even.  
ࡗ
 The mortar between the bricks should be in good to excellent condition. The satellite  
antenna foot should be mounted on several bricks. As the wind tugs on the satellite  
antenna, the foot will put heavy pressure (several hundred pounds) on those bricks in  
different directions. Loose or weakened mortar may allow the bricks to shift, changing the  
dish angle and reception quality, and possibly damaging the satellite antenna and the  
building. The installed satellite antenna could also hasten the deterioration of old mortar.  
ࡗ
 To mount the satellite antenna on brick, make sure that all of the fasteners are set into  
the brick, not into the mortar between the bricks. Use materials necessary to follow the  
local building codes.  
Page 6-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User and  
Installation Guide  
MOUNTING THE ANTENNA ON SIDING  
Materials Required  
Tools Required  
ࡗ
 2 lag screws, 1/4” x 3”  
ࡗ
 4 lag screws, 5/16” x 2”  
ࡗ
 drill  
ࡗ
 1/8” twist drill bit  
ࡗ
 3/16” twist drill bit  
ࡗ
 7/16” socket or box-end  
wrench  
ࡗ
 bubble level or plumb line  
ࡗ
 pencil  
We do not recommend mounting the satellite  
antenna on aluminum or vinyl siding. These  
materials can be structurally unsound, causing  
eventual shifting of the dish. To mount the  
satellite antenna on solid siding, make sure to  
follow the suggestions below.  
ࡗ
 The surface must be flat and even. You may need to use a separator, or shim, between  
the shingles to even the siding surface.  
ࡗ
 Mount the foot on the foundation material beneath the siding surface. This may be a  
building stud, cinder block, or other solid material. To locate the studs, find the vertical  
line of nails where the siding is attached to the building, or use a stud finder.  
Page 6-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Starting Your Installation  
Discussion of Potential Mounting Sites  
6
MOUNTING THE ANTENNA ON CINDER BLOCK  
Materials Required  
Tools Required  
ࡗ
 4 toggle anchors, 1/4”  
ࡗ
 drill  
ࡗ
 4 machine bolts, 1/4” x 3”  
ࡗ
 1/2” masonry drill bit  
ࡗ
 7/16” socket or box-end  
wrench  
ࡗ
 bubble level or plumb line  
ࡗ
 pencil  
You can mount the satellite antenna on cinder  
blocks, whether they are part of a wall or the  
side of a building.  
ࡗ
 The surface must be flat and even.  
ࡗ
 If you are mounting the satellite antenna on a building, make sure that the surface is true  
cinder block, not just a block facing over another material. If you are mounting the  
satellite antenna on block facing, see Mounting the Antenna on Siding on page 6-16.  
ࡗ
 Make sure that the cinder block and mortar is in good to excellent condition.  
ࡗ
 Use toggle anchors and machine bolts, inserted into the hollow of the block, as fasten-  
ers. Other types of anchors may not have the required strength.  
Page 6-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User and  
Installation Guide  
MOUNTING THE ANTENNA ON THE ROOF  
Materials Required  
Tools Required  
ࡗ
 2 lag screws, 1/4” x 3”  
ࡗ
 4 lag screws, 5/16” x 2”  
ࡗ
 roof sealant  
ࡗ
 drill  
ࡗ
 1/8” twist drill bit  
ࡗ
 3/16” twist drill bit  
ࡗ
 7/16” socket or box-end  
wrench  
ࡗ
 bubble level  
ࡗ
 ladder  
ࡗ
 pencil  
You can mount the satellite antenna on the  
roof. This usually provides the highest  
available location.  
ࡗ
 Attach the satellite antenna to a rafter beneath the roof surface. You can locate the rafter  
by looking for the nails attaching the fascia board to the rafters. You can also locate the  
rafters from inside the attic.  
ࡗ
 Make sure that the location is easily accessible in most weather conditions. You may  
need to sweep off snow, remove debris, or clean dirt from the dish surface.  
ࡗ
 To prevent the roof from leaking, you should caulk the holes, or use silicone sealant  
around the holes and at the bottom of the satellite antenna foot where it contacts the  
surface. Apply the sealant before you bolt the foot down tight.  
ࡗ
 Place the antenna so it is not directly downwind from a chimney or furnace vent. Soot  
can gather on the dish surface, weakening the reception. If practical, locate the antenna  
so the dish faces away from the chimney.  
ࡗ
 Do not mount the satellite antenna on a tile roof.  
Page 6-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Starting Your Installation  
Discussion of Potential Mounting Sites  
6
MOUNTING THE ANTENNA ON WOOD  
Materials Required  
Tools Required  
ࡗ
 4 lag screws, 5/16” x 2”  
ࡗ
 drill  
ࡗ
 1/8” twist drill bit  
ࡗ
 3/16” twist drill bit  
ࡗ
 7/16” socket or box-end  
wrench  
ࡗ
 bubble level or plumb line  
ࡗ
 pencil  
You can mount the satellite antenna on a wooden  
deck, wooden beam, or other wooden surface.  
ࡗ
 The surface must be flat and even.  
ࡗ
 Make sure that the wood has a solid foundation, and is secured. It should be a strong  
piece that cannot be moved or jiggled.  
ࡗ
 Do not mount the satellite antenna on a railing.  
ࡗ
 Do not mount the satellite antenna in a tree.  
Page 6-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User and  
Installation Guide  
NOTES  
Page 6-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing and  
7
Wiring Your System  
INSTALLING THE SATELLITE ANTENNA  
Once you have found the direction and elevation of the satellites and decided on the best  
mounting location, you can install the satellite antenna. Read through the Discussion of  
Potential Mounting Sites on page 6-13 before selecting your mounting location.  
ORIENTING THE MAST OR POLE  
It is very important that the upper part of the mast or the mounting pole, whichever you  
use, be truly plumb (that is, vertical). If not, the elevation provided by the recorder for your  
location will be inaccurate. This will make it more difficult for you to aim the antenna for  
the strongest signal.  
Vertical Mounting  
Surfaces  
Horizontal Mounting  
Surfaces  
Pole Mounting Surfaces  
The figure above shows  
how you should orient the  
mast on the foot for  
mounting on vertical  
surfaces.  
The figure above shows  
how you should orient the  
mounting pole.  
The figure above  
shows how you should  
orient the mast on the  
foot for mounting on  
horizontal surfaces.  
Page 7-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User and  
Installation Guide  
INSTALLING THE ANTENNA MOUNT  
Assemble the satellite antenna in a safe location before climbing up to the  
mounting location. Use caution when climbing, and when working at the  
mounting location.  
Before you attach the satellite antenna to a mounting surface, you should  
make sure that you can route the cable from your chosen location into the  
building, drilling holes where necessary, to the recorder.  
1. Gather all the items you will need for the  
assembly.  
2. If the dish support arm and the bracket that  
holds it came separately, attach the arm to the  
bracket with the supplied bolts.  
3. Mount the foot on the solid surface you have  
chosen.  
Page 7-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing and Wiring Your System  
Installing the Satellite Antenna  
7
4. Adjust the foot and mast so that when the foot  
is mounted, the upper part of the mast is, as  
accurately as possible, vertical. Use a plumb  
line or bubble level to make sure the upper part  
of the mast is vertical from at least three  
readings. Alignment of the dish is nearly  
impossible if the mast is not vertical.  
5. Place the dish on the support arm. Align the  
flathead bolts with the dish support bolt holes  
on the dish supports.  
6. Insert each flathead bolt into one of the holes,  
and secure it by threading a lock nut and  
washer onto the bolt on the back side. Do this  
for all the flathead bolts.  
7. Tighten the bolts so that they are snug.  
This is a picture of the support arm and bracket  
with the dish attached.  
8. Tilt the support bracket to the approximate  
elevation of the satellites. Use the elevation  
you found earlier using the Point Dish and  
Signal Strength menu.  
If you have the bracket with points above the  
elevation washer, align the elevation marks on  
the bracket with the points on the washer.  
Make sure you are looking at the side with the  
"46/60" lettering. The other side is for a  
different-sized dish.  
If you have the bracket where the edge of the  
mast shows through the curved slot, align the  
edge with the desired elevation mark.  
Page 7-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User and  
Installation Guide  
9. Slide the mast clamp down onto the mast.  
Make sure that the pivot bolt rests on the top of  
the mast.  
Tighten the elevation bolts and the pivot bolt  
so that the bracket is snug, but can still be  
moved up and down.  
Pivot  
Bolt  
Elevation  
Bolts  
(one on each side)  
10.Turn the antenna mount on the mast or pole to  
align the LNBF support arm in the direction of  
the satellites. Use the direction you found  
earlier using the Point Dish and Signal  
Strength menu.  
Tighten the mast clamp bolts so that the clamp  
is snug, but can still be moved back and forth.  
Mast Clamp  
Bolts  
You may have either one or two LNBF cables to attach, depending on which type of LNBF  
you purchased: single or dual output.  
Note: If you have to attach two cables to the LNBF, the following instructions apply to both  
cables. Use only RG-6 coaxial cables with "F" connectors. Do not use the 6 foot RF or  
VHF cable supplied with the recorder. This cable is used for the recorder to TV connection.  
Page 7-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing and Wiring Your System  
Installing the Satellite Antenna  
7
11.Thread the LNBF cable into the cable hole near  
the mast foot, up the mast and out the top of  
the mast.  
Cable  
Loop  
2"  
Arm  
Dish  
Support  
Pivot  
Bolt  
Mast  
Sleeve  
Do not kink or pinch the cable.  
Direction  
to Thread  
Coaxial Cable  
12.Take the end of the cable coming out the top of  
the mast, and thread it up the support arm.  
Mast  
RG-6  
Coaxial  
Cable  
Hole  
Mast  
Foot  
13.Loop the end of the cable over the pivot bolt.  
Cutaway View  
(dish omitted  
for clarity)  
14.Bring the cable back down on the outside of  
the mast sleeve, between the dish supports.  
15.Thread the cable through the arm and out the  
end of the arm.  
16.Adjust the cable so that there are about 2  
inches of cable out the end of the arm.  
17.Attach the LNBF to the coaxial cable(s).  
LNBF  
Connector  
Coaxial  
Cable  
Cutaway  
View of Arm  
18.Fit the LNBF into the dish support arm, sliding  
it in until it is inserted firmly. You may have to  
adjust the cable, pulling it back gently through  
the support arm.  
LNBF  
Connectors  
Cutaway  
View of Arm  
Coaxial  
Cable  
19.Attach the LNBF to the support arm, using the  
LNBF screw and washer.  
Cutaway  
View of Arm  
Washer  
Screw  
Page 7-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User and  
Installation Guide  
20.Pull the cable loop up into the top of the mast.  
Cutaway  
View of Arm  
Washer  
Screw  
INSTALLING THE ANTENNA ON A METAL POLE  
Note: Skip this section if you are using the mast that came with the satellite antenna.  
Materials Required  
ࡗ
 cable ties  
Tools Required  
ࡗ
 post hole digger  
ࡗ
 cement  
ࡗ
 7/16” socket or box-end  
wrench  
ࡗ
 bubble level or plumb line  
ࡗ
 pole  
You can mount the satellite antenna on a metal pole if necessary. This allows you a wider  
range of locations for installation. If used, the metal pole should have an outside diameter  
of 1.62 to 1.68 inches (typically, 1 5/8 inches), and should be sturdy enough not to flex in  
high winds. If the clamp is slightly loose, use sandpaper or emery cloth to shim the clamp,  
and tighten.  
You can mount the satellite antenna on a metal pole that is attached to an existing building.  
Make sure to follow all safety requirements, and ground the satellite antenna, pole, and  
cables in accordance with the National Electrical Code and local electrical codes.  
You can also mount the satellite antenna on a metal pole installed in the ground, as long as  
the soil provides a firm foundation (that is, the soil is not so rocky as to prevent digging a  
hole, nor so moist as to prevent proper curing of cement in the hole).  
Take extreme care to avoid contacting any overhead power lines, lights, and  
power circuits while you are installing the satellite antenna. Contact with any  
of these could prove fatal. Do not install the satellite antenna near power lines.  
Before you attach the pole to a mounting surface or install the pole in the  
ground, you should make sure that you can route the cable from your chosen  
location into the building, drilling holes where necessary, to the recorder.  
Page 7-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing and Wiring Your System  
Installing the Satellite Antenna  
7
The most common method to install the pole in the ground is to use cement to secure it in  
the hole. Make sure that the pole remains at 90˚ from horizontal as the cement dries. You  
may want to use guy wires or braces to keep the pole steady.  
A way of ensuring that the pole does not rotate in the dried cement is to cut the bottom of  
the pole at an angle, and to place a brick or flat rock in the bottom of the hole to support the  
pole before pouring in the cement.  
Use a plumb line to ensure that the pole is at 90˚ from horizontal. Take at least three  
measurements on different sides of the pole periodically while the cement is drying. Having  
the pole plumb allows you to accurately aim the antenna. If the pole is slightly off plumb,  
you can still aim the antenna for good reception, but it is very difficult.  
Typically, the cable is routed down outside the pole. However, if you want to route the  
LNBF cable up through the pole in the same manner as you would through the mast, you  
will need to drill a hole in the pole big enough to do this. The hole should be above ground  
after the pole has been set in the cement.  
You will not need the metal foot and mast assembly provided with the antenna for this  
installation, but you should keep the assembly in case you wish to relocate the antenna later.  
Follow the instructions for mounting the satellite  
antenna on a mast, but use the metal pole in place of  
the mast and foot.  
Bring the LNBF cable down the outside of the pole.  
Make sure to secure the cable firmly, but not too  
tightly, to the pole using tie-downs.  
Page 7-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User and  
Installation Guide  
GROUNDING AND WIRING THE SATELLITE ANTENNA  
As with any such installed devices, the satellite antenna and the coaxial cable(s) should be  
grounded in accordance with the National Electrical Code (NEC) and local electrical codes  
to provide some protection against damage caused by lightning strikes and other electrical  
discharges. Even lightning strikes several miles away can generate enough electricity in the  
air to damage your system. This section covers general steps you should take to  
properly ground both the satellite antenna mast and the cable.  
The importance of proper grounding cannot be overemphasized. It will  
minimize the potential for damage to your system and maximize safety. How  
you ground the system can also affect the performance of the system. This  
section is intended as a guideline only. See page A–3 for applicable sections  
of the National Electrical Code as of the publication date of this Guide. For  
more information, refer to the National Electrical Code and local electrical  
codes.  
The National Electrical Code and some local electrical codes permit the use of  
types of grounding other than those discussed in this Guide. Follow the  
National Electrical Code and all local electrical codes. Consult a licensed  
electrician or your local electric utility company if you have any questions.  
Make sure to locate and avoid underground sewer, gas, water, and telephone  
lines before digging. Your local utility companies can tell you where these are  
located.  
WHAT YOU WILL NEED  
ࡗ
 Copper-clad grounding rod - at least eight feet in length  
ࡗ
 Grounding rod clamp  
ࡗ
 Cable clips - Use weather-resistant, nail-in cable clips to route the coaxial cable.  
The clips hold the coaxial cable in place and prevent damage to it. Make sure not  
to pinch or puncture the cable.  
ࡗ
 Coaxial cable grounding block  
Page 7-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing and Wiring Your System  
Grounding and Wiring the Satellite Antenna  
7
ࡗ
 Two pieces of No. 10 solid copper or No. 8 solid aluminum ground wire - long enough  
to run from the coaxial cable grounding block to the grounding rod. A typical  
installation requires two to three feet of wire.  
A ground wire must always be a single piece of wire. Never splice two wires  
together for a ground. Corrosion and weathering can lead to a poor connection  
at the splice, making the ground ineffective and dangerous. If you cut your  
ground wire too short, replace it with a new single wire cut to the correct  
length.  
ࡗ
 Screwdrivers: Phillips and flathead  
ࡗ
 Ladder (if necessary)  
ࡗ
 Sledgehammer or small fence post driver  
ࡗ
 Drill and 1/2 inch drill bit - long enough to drill through the exterior wall of your  
building  
ࡗ
 Silicone sealant  
Before drilling any holes in the wall or roof of your building, make sure there  
are no wires or pipes in the area of the holes. If you are not comfortable doing  
this, contact a professional in your area. Make sure that you follow all safety  
instructions and building code regulations.  
The main objective of routing the cable is to secure it in place where it will not be  
dislodged by people, animals, or anything else, and it will not be damaged. Use cable clips  
in appropriate spots to secure the cable to the building. If you need to drill holes in portions  
of your building that may be exposed to rain or moisture, seal the holes with silicone sealant  
after installation.  
BEFORE YOU START  
The following guidelines apply to all grounding systems.  
ࡗ
 Make sure the grounding system provides a solid, permanent earth grounding in  
accordance with the National Electrical Code and local electrical codes. Contact a  
licensed electrician or the local electric utility company if you have any questions.  
Page 7-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User and  
Installation Guide  
ࡗ
 Refer to the grounding diagram on page ii of the "Important Product Safety  
Instructions." Note that this diagram suggests grounding the satellite antenna and  
coaxial cable to the power service grounding electrode system of the building.  
ࡗ
 If you install a grounding electrode system separate from the power service grounding  
electrode system, connect the separate electrode to the grounding system in accordance  
with the National Electrical Code and local electrical codes.  
INSTALLING THE GROUNDING BLOCK  
Depending on your mounting site and personal preference, you may want to install the  
grounding block onto the side of the building, or on some other sturdy structure near the  
satellite antenna. Make sure that the location is stable, and that you bolt the grounding  
block down securely.  
Locate the grounding block as close to the grounding rod as possible.  
ATTACHING THE CABLE TO THE GROUNDING BLOCK  
1. Using the shortest path possible, route the coaxial  
cable from the LNBF to the coaxial terminal on one  
side of the grounding block.  
If you are using a dual-port LNBF, route both coaxial  
cables to the grounding block.  
Grounding Block with LNBF Cable  
2. For each coaxial cable attached to the grounding  
block, connect a second coaxial cable onto the  
coaxial terminal on the other side of the grounding  
block. This is the cable that you will route into the  
building to the recorder.  
3. Insert one end of the ground wire into the grounding  
terminal on the grounding block. Tighten the screw  
to hold the wire firmly.  
Page 7-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing and Wiring Your System  
Grounding and Wiring the Satellite Antenna  
7
4. Attach the other end of the ground wire to a  
Grounding  
Block  
Coaxial  
Cable  
grounding electrode in accordance with the  
National Electrical Code and local electrical codes.  
from  
Drip  
Loop  
Antenna  
5. Use the cable clips to attach the cable to the side of  
the building. This helps prevent damage. The drip  
loops allow moisture to drip from the cables  
before being channeled into the grounding block or  
the building.  
GROUNDING THE MAST  
To protect your house and recorder, your antenna mast must also be grounded. To ground  
the mast, run a #8 or larger copper or aluminum wire from one of the bolts in the mast foot  
to the grounding rod, using the shortest possible path.  
WIRING FROM THE ANTENNA TO THE RECORDER  
ࡗ
 Use the shortest route possible to run the coaxial cable from the grounding block into  
the building and to your recorder. Do not kink or pinch the cable. This may damage it.  
ࡗ
 Locate your recorder inside the building against or near an outside wall. Then drill a  
1/2-inch hole through the outer wall to pass the cable inside the building.  
ࡗ
 If the recorder is located in an interior room, route the cable through the outside wall,  
and into an attic, basement, or crawl space to access the location.  
ࡗ
 Seal the exterior hole with silicone or other weatherproof sealant material after  
installation.  
ࡗ
 Once the cable is inside the building, you may attach it to a wall receptacle or directly to  
the recorder.  
Tighten the back panel coaxial cable connections only by hand. Using a  
wrench may over-tighten the connections, causing damage. Such damage is  
not covered by the Limited Warranty.  
Page 7-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User and  
Installation Guide  
AIMING THE ANTENNA FOR THE STRONGEST SIGNAL  
Typically, once you see a clear picture on your TV, a stronger signal will not noticeably  
affect the quality. Keep trying to aim the satellite antenna for the strongest possible signal.  
The stronger the signal, the better your chance of uninterrupted reception during periods of  
rain, snow, and heavy cloud cover. Do this after the satellite antenna is installed, wired, and  
grounded.  
When you are fine-tuning the reception, the Signal Strength bar in the Point Dish and  
Signal Strength menu shows you the signal level you are receiving. You can also use the  
signal tone if you cannot see the television screen.  
The possible levels are between 0% and 100%. It is not necessary for the signal  
strength to reach 100%, and you will most likely not get the signal strength to this level.  
The Signal Strength bar remains red with the word "Unlocked" displayed until you aim the  
satellite antenna at the satellites, and until you receive a strong enough signal to see a  
picture. Once this happens, the Signal Strength bar turns green and the word "Locked" is  
displayed. You can then fine-tune the aim of the antenna to gain the strongest possible  
signal.  
FINE-TUNING THE AIM OF THE SATELLITE ANTENNA  
If practical, try to keep the TV in view while doing the following procedure. Or, turn up the  
volume to use the signal sound to tell you when the dish has been aimed for best reception  
(the tone rises as the signal grows stronger, and lowers if the signal drops). If this is not  
practical, having an assistant will be helpful. This way one person can adjust the dish while  
the other person is watching the signal strength on the TV screen. The person watching the  
TV screen can then tell you when the signal is at its maximum practical strength.  
Remote  
Menu Options  
Buttons  
1. Press the Mode button until the remote  
MODE  
MENU  
is in SAT mode.  
2. Press the Menu button to open the  
Main Menu.  
3. Select the System Setup option.  
4. Select the Installation option.  
6
1
System Setup  
Installation  
6
1
Page 7-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing and Wiring Your System  
Aiming the Antenna for the Strongest Signal  
7
5. Select the Point Dish and Signal Strength  
1 Point Dish/Signal  
1
option.  
The recorder displays the Point Dish and  
Signal Strength menu.  
Point Dish and Signal Strength  
To calculate azimuth and elevation angles,  
Save  
Cancel  
Help  
enter your ZIP code  
Transponder refers to the channel transponder  
numbers that the recorder receives.  
Transponder numbers are automatically  
displayed.  
Transponder  
01  
ZIP Code  
80155  
Azimuth Angle: 191  
Elevation Angle: 42  
Angles adjusted for magnetic / true north deviations  
50  
0
100  
Locked  
Signal Strength 88%  
0
50  
100  
6. Look at the Signal Strength bar.  
Locked  
Signal Strength 88%  
If it is red and the word "Unlocked" is  
displayed, you may be aiming at the satellites  
but without a strong enough signal for a pic-  
ture. If you are using the audio tone, the sound  
will be an intermittent beeping tone.  
If it is green and the word "Locked" is  
displayed, you are aiming at the satellites and  
have a strong enough signal for a picture.  
Also, the audio tone will be steady. It rises as  
the signal gets stronger, and lowers as the  
signal strength drops.  
Avoid positioning yourself directly in front of the satellite antenna while  
aiming it, as your body may block much or all of the satellite signal.  
7. Loosen the mast clamp bolts just enough to be  
able to move the support bracket. Slowly  
move the dish from side to side until you find  
the strongest signal. Tighten the mast clamp  
bolts just enough so the dish cannot be moved  
horizontally.  
Mast Clamp  
Bolts  
Page 7-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User and  
Installation Guide  
8. Loosen the elevation bolts and the pivot bolt  
just enough to be able to move the support  
bracket. Slowly move the dish up and down  
until you find the strongest signal. Tighten the  
elevation bolts and pivot bolt just enough so  
the dish cannot be moved vertically.  
Pivot  
Bolt  
Elevation  
Bolts  
(1 on each  
side of  
bracket)  
9. Repeat steps 7 and 8 until the Signal Strength bar is green, the word "Locked" is  
displayed, and you have gained the strongest signal possible.  
Note: Move the dish slowly from side to side, or slowly up and down, not both at  
one time. Loosen the bolts before each movement, and tighten them again before the  
next movement.  
10.Press the remote control View button to exit the Point Dish and Signal Strength  
menu.  
The recorder will display an Attention message asking whether the installation is  
complete. Select the Yes option.  
The recorder will display a Warning message during satellite transmission ("down-  
load") of important system information to the recorder. Follow the direction in the  
message, not to disturb or unplug the recorder during the download.  
When the download is done, the recorder will briefly display an Attention: Acquiring  
Satellite Signal message. Then, the recorder should display the Preview Channel,  
which tells you about available programs, channels, and services. This indicates that  
you have properly aimed the dish.  
11.Tighten all the bolts to prevent movement of the satellite antenna.  
12.Mark the final locations on the mast and mounting bracket with a permanent marker.  
This assists you later if you have to realign the antenna because of movement due to  
wind or weather.  
Note: Do not scratch the painted surfaces to mark them. This will cause rusting.  
Page 7-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing and Wiring Your System  
Connecting the Recorder to a Telephone Line  
7
CONNECTING THE RECORDER TO A TELEPHONE LINE  
You must connect your recorder to an active telephone line if you want to purchase pay per  
view programs using the recorder. Attach a telephone line with a standard RJ-11 connector  
to the Telephone Jack on the recorder back panel, and then connect the line to an active  
telephone connection.  
When you purchase pay per view programs, the recorder stores the information in its  
memory. The recorder dials into the Service Center to send the purchase information.  
These calls are made in the middle of the night, at irregular times, and are toll-free (no  
cost to you).  
The recorder must be connected to an active telephone line at all times to order  
pay per view programs using the recorder.  
If you use a wireless telephone jack, be aware that some such jacks do not  
support all the features of this recorder.  
You must also set up the recorder for the type of telephone system you have (touchtone or  
rotary/pulse), and specify a telephone number prefix, if such a prefix is required to place an  
outside call.  
Note: A prefix is usually required only for business installations. For most residential  
installations, the default setting of No prefix needed will enable correct operation. In this  
case, you need only specify the telephone type.  
Do the following:  
Remote  
Menu Options  
Buttons  
1. Press the Mode button until the remote is in  
MODE  
MENU  
SAT mode.  
2. Press the Menu button to open the  
Main Menu.  
3. Select the System Setup option.  
4. Select the Installation option.  
6
1
System Setup  
Installation  
6
1
4
5. Select the Telephone System option.  
4 Telephone System  
6. Press the Up arrow button to move the  
highlight to the Phone Type list.  
Phone Type  
TouchTone  
Rotary / Pulse  
Page 7-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User and  
Installation Guide  
7. Press the Up or Down arrow button to  
highlight either the TouchTone or the  
Rotary/Pulse option.  
8. Press the Select button.  
SELECT  
Note: For most residential installations,  
you need only specify the telephone  
system type. If this is the case, select the  
Save option to save the above setting,  
and stop here. If not, do steps 9 and 10  
before you select the Save option.  
Save  
9. Press the Left arrow button to move the  
highlight to the Outside Line Prefix list.  
Outside Line Prefix  
No prefix needed  
One-digit code  
Two-digit code  
E
10.Press the Up or Down arrow button to  
highlight the No prefix needed, the  
One-digit code, or the Two-digit code  
option.  
Press the Select button.  
SELECT  
If you selected the One-digit code  
option, the recorder displays a box  
where you must enter the digit. To do  
this, press the appropriate number pad  
button.  
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
First Digit  
Second Digit  
If you selected the Two-digit code option,  
the recorder displays boxes where you  
must enter the digits. To do this, press the  
appropriate number pad buttons.  
11.Select the Save option to save the above  
Save  
settings.  
Page 7-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing and Wiring Your System  
Ordering Your Programming  
7
ORDERING YOUR PROGRAMMING  
This procedure notifies the Service Center that your system is on-line and installed.  
You need to have your services activated before you can start enjoying your desired  
programming. You must authorize your services when you first install your system, and  
whenever you request to add or remove services.  
All you need to do is call to notify the Service Center that your system has been installed  
and you would like to begin receiving programming. The Service Representative will  
explain the available program packages and services. You can then select the services that  
you want to authorize.  
You will need to give the Service Representative information about your system. To get this  
information, do the following: Power the recorder OFF, using the remote control Power  
button (not the recorder Power button). Then, press the Info button on the recorder or  
remote. This will display the Important System Information menu, as shown below. To  
exit this menu, press the Select button on the recorder or remote.  
Note: The recorder is still OFF. You will have to press the Power button on either the  
remote or the recorder to turn the recorder back ON.  
Info screen  
Title  
Important System Information  
Receiver  
Condtional  
Access  
Number  
Model ID : IRR  
Model ID  
Receiver CA ID : R0016825089-94  
Smart Card CA ID : S0000278950-56  
DNASP002 Rev052  
Software Version : 205PBTAA-F  
Boot Strap Version : 100BBTAA  
Customer Service : 1-800-333-DISH (3474)  
Internet Address : http://www.dishnetwork.com  
Remote Address : 9  
SmartCard  
Conditional  
Access Number  
Software  
Versions  
Access to  
Assistance  
Remote  
Control  
Address  
Copyright © 1996, EchoStar Communications  
OK  
Press Select  
to Exit Info  
Screen  
Corporation. All Rights Reserved.  
The Service Representative will authorize your programming signal  
using the satellite signal. This includes checking that the Smart Card is  
properly inserted in the recorder.  
When the services are authorized, you should see channels other than the  
Preview Channel.  
SERVICE CENTER PIN  
As an option, the Service Representative will ask you if you want to set up a Service Center  
Personal Identification Number (PIN). See Service Center Security on page 4-29 for more  
information.  
Page 7-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User and  
Installation Guide  
WIRING YOUR SYSTEM TOGETHER  
MULTIPLE RECEIVERS  
Each output on the LNBF can support a single receiver. You cannot connect two  
receivers to the same output (for example, by using a line splitter), because the two receivers  
would interfere with each other during channel selection. This is a characteristic of satellite  
television in general, and is not a limitation that is specific to this system.  
If you want to connect two receivers to the same satellite antenna and be able to watch  
different channels through each, you must use a dual-output LNBF. This allows you to  
connect each receiver to a different output, preventing interference between the receivers.  
In this case, during installation you must run a separate coaxial cable from each output on  
the LNBF to each receiver.  
If you want to purchase an LNBF different from the one that you originally purchased,  
contact your local satellite dealer or call the Service Center.  
The following wiring setups assume installation of a single receiver. If you are installing  
multiple receivers, modify your wiring accordingly.  
ABOUT CABLING AND CONNECTIONS  
The way in which you wire your system and the kinds of cabling you choose can make a  
noticeable difference in the quality of the picture and sound. No doubt you will want to  
wire your system to take advantage of the highest quality supported by your equipment.  
You will need to examine your electronic equipment to determine what type of connectors  
and cables, and which wiring setup to use.  
Do the following.  
1. Look on the back of each piece of equipment that you are planning to install with the  
recorder and note the type of connectors on the equipment.  
2. Starting from the connectors that support the highest quality, determine which pieces of  
equipment can be connected together using the designated type of cable.  
3. Review the wiring setups beginning on page 7-21 to choose which one is the closest to  
your planned configuration.  
4. Use that setup as the basic plan to wire your system together. If you have additional  
components, or do not have all of the components that are in the setup, adjust the wiring  
accordingly.  
Page 7-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing and Wiring Your System  
Wiring Your System Together  
7
RF OR VHF CONNECTIONS (GOOD PICTURE AND SOUND)  
Cable  
Connectors on  
Recorder  
VHF/UHF  
ANT. IN  
RF OUT  
The RF or VHF connections (also called the modulator connections) provide good picture  
and good mono ("non-stereo") sound quality. Be aware that even if you have a TV and  
other equipment that support stereo sound, this type of connection will give you only  
non-stereo sound.  
If you connect a cable TV box or a broadcast TV antenna to the recorder, use the VHF/UHF  
Ant. In connection for the local programming signal input. Use the TV Phono (RCA)  
Audio/Video Output or S-VIDEO connections for the output if possible, as using the RF  
Out (RF or VHF Connection) will not provide the best quality video on broadcast or cable  
channels.  
This is the simplest cabling scheme, and many people prefer it because of its ease of  
installation and use. The RF or VHF connections require that you keep the TV tuned to  
either channel 3 or 4 to view satellite channels. You also need to set the Channel 3/4 switch  
on the recorder's back panel to match this channel.  
PHONO (RCA) AUDIO/VIDEO CONNECTIONS  
(BETTER PICTURE, BEST SOUND)  
Cable  
Connectors on  
Recorder  
YELLOW -VIDEO  
YELLOW  
WHITE  
RED  
1
2
OUT  
WHITE - LEFT AUDIO  
RED - RIGHT AUDIO  
R
L
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
The phono (RCA) audio/video connections provide better picture quality and the best stereo  
sound. You should use this type of connection for audio, if possible, and for video if your  
equipment does not support S-VIDEO (see following).  
Page 7-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User and  
Installation Guide  
The phono (RCA) audio/video cable is available as a single cable with three connectors on  
either end, or as three separate cables. The connectors are color-coded according to the type  
of signal they carry.  
ࡗ
 The yellow connector carries the video signal.  
ࡗ
 The white connector carries the left audio signal.  
ࡗ
 The red connector carries the right audio signal.  
If your TV only has one input connection for this type of audio, connect it to the left (L)  
audio connection on the recorder.  
If you use the phono (RCA) audio/video connections, then depending on the type of  
equipment that you connect to the recorder, you may need to use the menus displayed by  
each piece of equipment to change the input from local to satellite TV. See the product  
documentation that came with your other electronic equipment for more information.  
S-VIDEO CONNECTIONS (BEST PICTURE)  
Cable  
Connectors on  
Recorder  
S-VIDEO  
S-VIDEO, also called super-video or SVHS, provides the best possible picture. Many  
newer TVs and VCRs support S-VIDEO. If you use these connections, you must still  
connect the audio signal using the audio connectors; however, you would not use the video  
connectors. The S-VIDEO connections carry only the video signal.  
Page 7-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing and Wiring Your System  
Wiring Your System Together  
7
WIRING SETUPS  
The following wiring setups present several methods for wiring your system. Many of these  
options depend on what electronic components you are connecting, and what type of con-  
nectors the components support. See About Cabling and Connections on page 7-18 for  
more information.  
Most of the wiring setups assume the following:  
ࡗ
 You have a broadcast TV antenna or a cable TV box that you want to connect to the  
system.  
ࡗ
 You want to optimize your system to carry the best picture and sound quality that it can  
support.  
The wiring setups presented here range from easiest (RF or VHF connections only), with the  
fewest electronic components, to the most advanced, with multiple electronic components.  
All connections are shown in most of the setups.  
Preview the setups to determine the one that most closely matches your equipment, and then  
use that setup as the basis for your wiring installation.  
Page 7-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User and  
Installation Guide  
QUICK INSTALL (WITH RF OR UHF CONNECTION)  
The Quick Install setup is designed to get your system running as quickly as possible. This  
is especially useful if you are setting up your system yourself. You use this setup initially to  
assist you in finding the direction and elevation of the satellite, as well as obtaining a signal  
from it.  
Features  
Equipment  
Quality  
ࡗ
ࡗ
ࡗ
Quickest wiring setup.  
Minimum number of components.  
Can easily view both satellite and local programs by using the Local TV  
Link feature.  
ࡗ
ࡗ
ࡗ
Recorder  
TV  
Cable TV box or  
broadcast antenna  
ࡗ
ࡗ
Good picture  
Good non-stereo  
sound  
Broadcast  
TV Antenna  
Antenna  
Telephone  
Connection  
or  
Cable  
Grounding  
Block  
Grounding  
Wire for  
Mast  
Grounding  
Wire  
AC`IN  
1
ANT. IN  
DC OUT 5V  
HIGH SPEED DATA PORT  
OUT  
2
13/18V}400mA  
ACCESSORY AC-3 SATELLITE  
R
L
PHONE JACK  
S-VIDEO  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
VHF/UHF  
ANT. IN  
UHF  
REMOTE  
ANTENA  
RF OUT  
CH3  
CH4  
Grounding  
Rod  
Grounding  
Rod Clamp  
Recorder  
RF or VHF  
INPUT  
TV  
UHF  
Remote  
Antenna  
Note: Ground the satellite antenna, coaxial cable(s), and broadcast TV antenna in  
accordance with the National Electrical Code and local electrical codes.  
Page 7-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing and Wiring Your System  
Wiring Your System Together  
7
FULL INSTALL (WITH AUDIO/VIDEO CONNECTIONS)  
Features  
Equipment  
Quality  
ࡗ
Can record local or satellite programming on the VCR (you cannot tape  
copyrighted materials).  
Can play back tapes on VCR by tuning to channel 000.  
Can easily view both satellite and local programs by using the Local TV  
Link feature.  
ࡗ
ࡗ
ࡗ
Recorder  
TV  
Cable TV box or  
broadcast antenna  
ࡗ
ࡗ
Better Picture to TV  
Better stereo sound  
to TV and VCR.  
ࡗ
ࡗ
Grounding  
Wire for Mast  
TV  
Antenna  
RF or VHF  
INPUT  
R
L
AUDIO  
IN  
VIDEO  
IN  
Broadcast  
S-VIDEO  
IN  
TV Antenna  
Grounding  
Rod Clamp  
Grounding  
Block  
or  
Cable  
Grounding  
Wire  
Grounding  
Rod  
AC`IN  
1
2
ANT. IN  
DC OUT 5V  
HIGH SPEED DATA PORT  
OUT  
13/18V}400mA  
R
L
PHONE JACK  
ACCESSORY AC-3 SATELLITE  
S-VIDEO  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
VHF/UHF  
ANT. IN  
UHF  
REMOTE  
ANTENA  
RF OUT  
CH3  
CH4  
Recorder  
L
R
AUDIO  
IN  
Audio  
Amplifier  
UHF  
Remote  
Antenna  
Telephone  
Connection  
Note: Ground the satellite antenna, coaxial cable(s), and broadcast TV antenna in  
accordance with the National Electrical Code and local electrical codes.  
Page 7-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User and  
Installation Guide  
FULL INSTALL (WITH S-VIDEO CONNECTION)  
Features  
Equipment  
Quality  
ࡗ
Can record local or satellite programming on the VCR (you may not tape  
copyrighted materials).  
Can play back tapes on VCR by tuning to channel 000.  
Can easily view both satellite and local programs by using the Local TV  
Link feature.  
ࡗ
ࡗ
Recorder  
TV with S-VIDEO  
IN  
Cable TV box or  
broadcast antenna  
Audio amplifier  
(optional)  
ࡗ
ࡗ
Best picture to TV.  
Best stereo sound to  
TV and audio  
amplifier.  
If only RF or VHF  
connections used,  
good picture and  
non-stereo sound to  
TV.  
ࡗ
ࡗ
ࡗ
ࡗ
ࡗ
Grounding  
Wire for Mast  
TV  
RF or VHF  
INPUT  
Antenna  
R
L
AUDIO  
IN  
VIDEO  
IN  
S-VIDEO  
IN  
Broadcast  
TV Antenna  
Grounding  
Rod Clamp  
Grounding  
Block  
Alternate  
video-  
higher  
or  
Cable  
Grounding  
Wire  
Grounding  
Rod  
quality  
AC`IN  
1
2
ANT. IN  
DC OUT 5V  
HIGH SPEED DATA PORT  
OUT  
13/18V}400mA  
R
L
PHONE JACK  
ACCESSORY AC-3 SATELLITE  
S-VIDEO  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
VHF/UHF  
ANT. IN  
UHF  
REMOTE  
ANTENA  
RF OUT  
CH3  
CH4  
Recorder  
L
R
AUDIO  
IN  
Audio  
Amplifier  
UHF  
Remote  
Antenna  
Telephone  
Connection  
Note: Ground the satellite antenna, coaxial cable(s), and broadcast TV antenna in  
accordance with the National Electrical Code and local electrical codes.  
Page 7-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing and Wiring Your System  
Manual Clock Setting  
7
MANUAL CLOCK SETTING  
If the recorder is connected to a properly installed DISH Network™ antenna, the recorder's  
clock will be set automatically. However, if you ever need to set the clock manually be-  
cause the DISH antenna has been disconnected, etc., do the following:  
Remote  
Menu Options  
Buttons  
1. Press the Mode button until the remote is in  
MODE  
MENU  
SAT mode.  
2. Press the Menu button to open the  
Main Menu.  
3. Select the VCR Setup option.  
8
VCR Setup  
8
4. Press the arrow buttons to move the  
Set Date/Time  
highlight to Set Date/Time.  
5. Press the Select button to open the  
Time and Date Setup screen.  
SELECT  
6. Press the Left or Right arrow button to  
move the highlight to Daylight Savings.  
7. Press the Select button to place a  
checkmark in the checkbox next to  
Daylight Savings. Pressing the Select  
button again will remove the checkmark.  
ࡗ
 Turn the Daylight Savings function to let  
the recorder automatically adjust its clock  
to Daylight Savings Time, or turn the  
function off if Daylight Savings Time  
does not apply to your area.  
Daylight Savings  
SELECT  
Page 7-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User and  
Installation Guide  
8. Press the Left or Right arrow button to  
move the highlight to the "Month"  
under Date.  
9. Press the number buttons to set the  
Month, Day, Hour and Minute.  
To input a one-digit number, be sure to  
insert a zero first.  
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
10.Press the arrow buttons to select  
AM or PM and then press Select  
button.  
PM  
AM  
11.Press the arrow buttons to move the  
Save  
highlight to Save.  
12.Press the Select button to start the  
SELECT  
clock.  
DAYLIGHT SAVINGS  
This function enables automatic adjustment of the recorder's clock at the start and end of  
Daylight Savings Time.  
With Daylight Savings activated,...  
...on the first Sunday of April at 2:00 AM, the clock is adjusted to 3:00 AM.  
...on the last Sunday of October at 2:00 AM, the clock is adjusted to 1:00 AM.  
Note:  
ࡗ
 While a DISH antenna is properly connected, manual clock setting is not possible.  
Page 7-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
A
FCC COMPLIANCE  
TELEPHONE COMMUNICATION  
The following text is extracted from Federal Communication Commission  
(FCC) regulations, as of the publication date of this Guide. Contact the FCC  
(see following) or your library for the complete text of the regulations.  
This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules. On the rear panel of this  
equipment is a label that contains, among other information, the FCC registration number  
and ringer equivalence number (REN) for this equipment. If requested, this information  
must be provided to the telephone company.  
The REN for this product is 0.7B.  
The REN is used to determine the quantity of devices which may be connected to the  
telephone line. Excessive RENs on the telephone line may result in the devices not ringing  
in response to an incoming call. In most, but not all areas, the sum of the RENs should not  
exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to the line,  
as determined by the total RENs, contact the telephone company to determine the maximum  
REN for the calling area.  
This equipment uses the following USOC (Universal Service Order Code)  
jacks: RJ-11C.  
An FCC compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this equipment.  
This equipment is designed to be connected to the telephone network or premises wiring  
using a compatible modular jack which is Part 68 compliant.  
This equipment cannot be used on telephone company-provided coin service.  
Connection to Party Line Service is subject to state tariffs.  
If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify  
you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. If advance notice is  
not practical, the telephone company will notify the customer as soon as possible. Also, you  
will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary.  
The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations, or  
procedures that could affect the operation of the equipment. If this happens, the telephone  
company will provide advance notice in order for you to make the necessary modifications  
in order to maintain uninterrupted service.  
If you experience trouble with this equipment, please contact the Service Center at  
1-800-333-3474 for repair and warranty information. If the trouble is causing harm to the  
telephone network, the telephone company may request you remove the equipment from  
the network until the problem is resolved.  
Page A-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User and  
Installation Guide  
The customer may perform minor adjustments such as the following, in case of problems  
with the equipment.  
ࡗ
 Move or realign the antenna or receiving device, such as your broadcast TV antenna.  
ࡗ
 Increase the distance between the recorder and the equipment with the interference.  
Change the angle of the recorder relative to the equipment.  
ࡗ
 Plug the recorder into a different power outlet, preferably on a different fuse circuit  
within your building.  
Refer to the Problems and Solutions Tables on page A–10 for a detailed description of  
recommended customer actions.  
You may not attempt to open the recorder, as this will void the warranty (with  
the exception of opening the Smart Card access door on the recorder front  
panel). There is risk of electrical shock, which may result in damage to the  
equipment, or personal injury or death. There are no user-serviceable parts  
inside the recorder. Unauthorized modification will void the warranty.  
This equipment is hearing-aid compatible.  
It is recommended that the customer install an AC surge arrestor in the AC outlet to which  
this device is connected. This is to avoid damage to the equipment caused by local lightning  
strikes and other electrical surges.  
RADIO INTERFERENCE  
The recorder complies with the limits for a Class B digital device, as specified in Part 15 of  
the FCC Rules. This compliance helps ensure against radio interference with other  
equipment in a typical residential location. Except for the telephone cable, you are required  
to use shielded cables and cords, such as coaxial and communication cables, to maintain  
FCC compliance.  
The recorder does use radio frequencies during operation. If you do not install or use the  
recorder properly, radio energy may be generated that can interfere with radio  
communications. Also, it is possible that radio interference can occur even in a proper  
installation. The typical symptom of radio interference is distortion of television or radio  
reception. You can determine if the recorder is the cause by confirming that the interference  
stops if you unplug the recorder from the power outlet, and the interference returns when  
you plug the recorder back into the outlet.  
If none of the remedies on the previous page stops the radio interference, contact a licensed  
radio/television technician, your satellite dealer, or call the Service Center at 1-800-333-  
3474, for assistance.  
Page A-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
National Electrical Code (NEC)  
A
In addition, the FCC provides a booklet that can help you. You can order the booklet from  
the following address:  
How to Identify and Resolve Radio-TV Interference Problems  
Stock No. 004-000-00345-4  
U.S. Government Printing Office  
Washington, DC 20402  
NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE (NEC)  
The following text contains excerpts of the National Electrical Code (NEC) that  
relate to grounding your system. This text contains only portions of the Code,  
as of the publication date of this Guide. For authoritative guidance, you should  
consult the latest revision of the National Electrical Code, or a licensed electrician. Also,  
before doing any installations in your area, it is important that you check for any local codes  
that may affect the installation of the system.  
Proper grounding is essential. Improperly grounded or ungrounded systems  
could result in electrical shock, fire, and death.  
250-1. SCOPE  
This article covers general requirements for grounding and bonding of electrical  
installations and specific requirements in (a) through (f) below.  
(a) Systems, circuits and equipment required, permitted or not permitted to be  
grounded.  
(b) Circuit conductors to be grounded on grounded systems.  
(c) Location of grounding connections.  
(d) Types and sizes of grounding and bonding conductors and electrodes.  
(e) Methods of grounding and bonding.  
(f) Conditions under which guards, isolation, or insulation may besubstituted for grounding.  
250-81. GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM.  
If available on the premises at each building or structure served, each item (a) through (d)  
below, and any made electrodes in accordance with Sections 250-83 (c) and (d), shall be  
bonded together to form the grounding electrode system. Interior metal water piping located  
more than 5 feet (152cm) from the point of entrance to the building shall not be used as a  
conductor to interconnect the electrodes and the grounding electrode conductor. The bond-  
ing jumper shall be installed in accordance with Sections 250-92(a) and (b), shall be sized in  
accordance with Section 250-94, and shall be connected in the manner specified in Section  
250-115. The unspliced grounding electrode conductor shall be permitted to run to any  
convenient grounding electrode available in the grounding electrode system.  
Page A-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User and  
Installation Guide  
It shall be sized for the largest grounding electrode conductor required among all the  
available electrodes.  
(a) Metal Underground Water Pipe. A metal underground water pipe in direct contact with  
the earth for 10 feet (3.05m) or more (including any metal well casing effectively  
bonded to the pipe) and electrically continuous by bonding around insulating joints or  
sections or insulating pipe to the points of connection of the grounding electrode  
conductor and the bonding conductors. Continuity of the grounding path or the bonding  
connection to interior piping shall not rely on water meters. A metal underground water  
pipe shall be supplemented by an additional electrode of a type specified in Section 250-  
81 or in Section 250-83. The supplemental electrode shall be permitted to be bonded to  
the grounding electrode conductor, the grounded service-entrance conductor, the  
grounded service raceway, or any grounded service enclosure.  
250-83. MADE AND OTHER ELECTRODES.  
Where none of the electrodes specified in Section 250-81 is available, one or more of the  
electrodes specified in (b) through (d)* below shall be used. Where practicable, made  
electrodes shall be embedded below permanent moisture level. Made electrodes shall be  
free from nonconductive coatings, such as paint or enamel. Where more than one electrode  
is used, each electrode of one grounding system (including that used for lightning rods) shall  
not be less than 6 feet (1.83m) from any other electrode of another grounding system.  
(a) Rod and Pipe Electrodes. Rod and pipe electrodes shall not be less than 8 feet (2.44m)  
in length and shall consist of the following materials, and shall be installed in the fol-  
lowing manner:  
(1) Electrodes of pipe or conduit shall not be smaller than 3/4-inch (15.87mm) in  
diameter, nonferrous rods, or their equivalent shall be listed and shall not be less  
than 1/2 inch (12.7mm) in diameter.  
(2) Electrodes of rods of iron or steel shall be at least 5/8 inch (15.87mm) in diameter.  
Stainless steel rods less than 5/8 inch (15.87mm) in diameter, nonferrous rods, or  
their equivalent shall be listed and shall not be less than 1/2 inch (12.7mm) in  
diameter.  
(3) The electrode shall be installed such that at least 8 feet (2.44m) except that, where  
rock bottom is encountered, the electrode shall be driven at an oblique angle not to  
exceed 45 degrees from the vertical or shall be buried in a trench that is at least 2 1/2  
feet (762mm) deep. The upper end of the electrode shall be flush with or below  
ground level unless the aboveground end and the grounding electrode conductor  
attachment are protected against physical damage as specified in Section 250-1167.  
Page A-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
National Electrical Code (NEC)  
A
250-115. CONNECTION TO ELECTRODES  
The grounding conductor shall be connected to the grounding electrode by exothermic  
welding, listed lugs, listed pressure connectors, listed clamps, or other listed means.  
Connections depending on solder shall not be used. Ground clamps shall be listed for the  
materials of the grounding electrode and the grounding electrode conductor and, where used  
on pipe, rod, or other buried electrodes, shall also be listed for direct soil burial. Not more  
than one conductor shall be connected to the grounding electrode by a single clamp or  
fitting unless the clamp or fitting is listed for multiple conductors. One of the methods  
indicated in (a), (b), (c), or (d) below shall be used.  
(a) Bolted clamp: A listed bolted clamp of cast bronze or brass, or plain or malleable iron.  
(b) Pipe Fitting, Pipe Plug, etc.: A pipe fitting, pipe plug, or other approved device screwed  
into a pipe or pipe fitting.  
(c) Sheet-Metal-Strap Type Ground Clamp: A listed sheet-metal-strap type ground clamp  
having a rigid metal base that seats on the electrode and having a strap of such material  
and dimensions that it is not likely to stretch during or after installation.  
810-15. GROUNDING  
Masts and metal structures supporting antennas shall be grounded in accordance with  
Section 810-21.  
810-21. GROUNDING CONDUCTORS - RECEIVING STATIONS  
Grounding conductors shall comply with (a) through (j) below.  
(a) Material. The grounding conductor shall be of copper, aluminum, copper-clad steel,  
bronze, or similar corrosion-resistant material.  
(b) Insulation. Insulation on grounding conductors shall not be required.  
(c) Supports. The grounding conductors shall be securely fastened in place and shall be  
permitted to be directly attached to the surface wired over without the use of insulating  
supports.  
(d) Mechanical Protection. The grounding conductor shall be protected where exposed to  
physical damage, or the size of the grounding conductors shall be increased  
proportionately to compensate for the lack of protection.  
(e) Run in Straight Line. The grounding conductor for an antenna mast or antenna dis-  
charge unit shall be run in as straight a line as practicable from the mast or discharge  
unit to the grounding electrode.  
Page A-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User and  
Installation Guide  
(f) Electrode. The grounding conductor shall be connected as follows:  
(1) To the nearest accessible location on the building or structure grounding electrode  
system as covered in Section 250-81, (2) the grounded interior metal water piping  
system as covered in Section 250-80(a), (3) the power service accessible means  
external to enclosures as covered in Section 250-71(b), (4) the metallic power  
service raceway, (5) the service equipment enclosure, or (6) the grounding electrode  
conductor or the grounding electrode conductor metal enclosures; or  
(2) If the building or structure served has no grounding means, as described in (f)(1), to  
any one of the individual electrodes described in Section 250-81; or  
(3) If the building or structure served has no grounding means, as described in (f)(1) or  
(f)(2), to (1) an effectively grounded metal structure or (2) to any of the individual  
electrodes described in Section 250-83.  
(g) Inside or Outside Building. The grounding conductor shall be permitted to be run either  
inside or outside the building.  
(h) Size. The grounding conductor shall not be smaller than No. 10 copper or No. 8  
aluminum or No. 17 copper-clad steel or bronze.  
(i) Common ground. A single grounding conductor shall be permitted for both protective  
and operating purposes.  
(j) Bonding of Electrodes. A bonding jumper not smaller than No. 6 copper or equivalent  
shall be connected between the radio and television equipment grounding electrode and  
the power grounding electrode system at the building or structure served where separate  
electrodes are used.  
Page A-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Glossary  
A
GLOSSARY  
Audio Connection  
Highest quality phono (RCA) audio connection available.  
Provides excellent stereo sound. Separate connectors are  
required for left and right audio signals.  
Azimuth  
See Direction.  
Blacked Out Program  
A program that cannot be viewed in specific locations (for  
example, a sports event).  
Broadcast Programming  
Cable Programming  
Changing Channels  
Your local and network channels. These are local channels  
available via the system.  
Your local cable channels. These are local channels available  
via the system.  
While viewing a program, selecting channels using the Up or  
Down arrow buttons or the number pad.  
Channel Surfing  
Composite Video  
Direction  
See Changing Channels.  
See Video Connection.  
Also called “azimuth.” Refers to the left or right positioning of  
your satellite antenna. Direction is noted on the compass in the  
form of numbers indicating degrees. When you are adjusting  
the antenna, you can enter your ZIP code into the Point Dish  
and Signal Strength menu. The menu will display the direction  
and elevation to the satellites so you can aim your satellite antenna.  
Elevation  
The up/down positioning of the satellite antenna. When you are  
adjusting the antenna, you can enter your ZIP code into the  
Point Dish and Signal Strength menu, and the display will show  
the approximate elevation for your antenna.  
Event  
See Program.  
Flash Feature  
A feature that allows recorder memory to be updated by  
transmission via satellite signal.  
Page A-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User and  
Installation Guide  
IR (Infra-Red)  
LNBF  
Some remotes use infra-red light to transmit signals to  
equipment. Some remotes that come with the recorder use UHF  
to control the recorder, and IR to control other equipment;  
others use IR to control the recorder also.  
Low-Noise Block amplifier with integrated Feed. This is the  
component that receives the signals reflected from the dish  
surface and transmits them to the recorder.  
Local TV Link  
A feature that allows you to add local broadcast or cable TV  
channels to the Program Guide.  
Modulator Connection  
See RF or VHF Connection.  
Pay Per View  
Program  
A program that you pay an additional fee to view once.  
Program  
A TV show, movie, or pay per view event.  
Program Guide  
An on-screen guide to all the programs that are currently being  
shown, and all the programs that will be shown for the next  
week. You can select current and future programs, and  
purchase pay per view events in the Program Guide.  
Rating Codes  
Codes have been assigned to the program to indicate content  
and suggested audience.  
The following codes are used:  
G: General Audience. Suitable for young children.  
P: Parental Guidance suggested.  
PG-13: Parental Guidance suggested. Not recommended for  
children under the age of 13.  
R: Restricted. No children admitted under the age of 17 unless  
accompanied by an adult.  
NC-17: No Children under the age of 17 admitted.  
NR/AO: Not Rated/Adult Oriented  
Expanded Ratings, locked out by content:  
Language: Adult language.  
Page A-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Glossary  
A
Violence: Graphic Violence.  
Sexual Content: Sexual scenes.  
Nudity: Nude scenes.  
Receiver  
The piece of equipment that controls your access to all network  
features and programs.  
RF  
Radio Frequency.  
RF or VHF Connection  
Also called modulator connection. A type of connection that  
supports good picture quality, and good mono (“non-stereo”)  
sound. Usually the easiest and quickest method to wire your  
system together.  
Satellite Antenna  
The piece of equipment that receives the broadcast signal from  
the satellites, amplifies it, and transmits it to the recorder. This  
refers to the entire antenna assembly, whether it is mounted on  
the mast, or on a pole.  
S-VIDEO, or Super  
VHS  
Highest quality video connection. If used, the audio  
connections must also be used.  
UHF  
Ultra-high frequency. Some remote controls use UHF to  
control equipment. Some remotes that come with the recorder  
use UHF to control the recorder and infra-red (IR) to control  
other equipment. UHF signals can travel longer distances than  
(IR), and can penetrate objects, making it possible to control  
the equipment from other rooms in the building. Some  
broadcast TV channels are UHF (typically 14 through 69).  
Video Connection  
VHF  
Better quality phono (RCA) video connection. Also called  
composite video.  
Very-high frequency. Some broadcast TV channels are VHF  
(typically 2 through 13).  
Page A-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User and  
Installation Guide  
PROBLEMS AND SOLUTIONS TABLES  
Note: For warranty service on your recorder, call the number printed on the  
outside back cover of this Guide.  
Use this section if you encounter problems operating the system. Look in this section for a  
description of your problem before calling the Service Center. Many problems arise from  
basic misunderstandings of how the system operates, especially when you are just becoming  
familiar with it. This section addresses many situations, usually with a simple solution for  
each one.  
Do the following to solve your particular problem.  
1. Review the section in this Guide that relates to your problem.  
2. If you cannot find a solution, then find the section of the following tables that relates to your  
problem. Look down the What Is Happening column until you find your problem.  
3. If you are interested, read the information in the Possible Why column.  
4. Try each of the suggested solutions in the What to Do column.  
If this does not solve your problem, or if you cannot find your problem in these tables, call  
the DISH Network Service Center at 1-800-333-3474, or see the Dish Network's home page  
at http:// www.dishnetwork.com on the World Wide Web.  
Page A-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Problems and Solutions Tables  
A
ASSEMBLE THE SATELLITE ANTENNA  
What Is  
Happening  
Possible Why  
What to Do  
The support arm and  
bracket are separate  
pieces.  
Some models of the support arm/  
bracket require assembly.  
Assemble the support arm and bracket.  
You want your system  
You must have a dual input LNBF Call the Service Center to order a dual output LNBF.  
to support two receivers, to support two receivers. You must  
but you have only a  
single input LNBF.  
also run a separate coaxial cable  
from each LNBF output to each  
receiver. This is a characteristic of  
satellite TV in general, not just this  
system.  
AIM THE SATELLITE ANTENNA  
What Is  
Possible Why  
What to Do  
Happening  
The Signal Strength bar The satellite antenna may be aimed Adjust the aim of the antenna slowly until the Signal Strength  
indicates a signal at the satellites, but without a bar turns green and displays the word “Locked.”  
strength, but is red and signal strength sufficient to display  
displays the word  
“Unlocked.”  
a TV picture.  
The Signal Strength bar A variety of atmospheric factors (in It is not necessary for the signal strength to reach 100%. If your  
is green, but you cannot particular, heavy rain or snow) may system provides you an acceptable picture, you do not need to do  
fine-tune the antenna  
aim for a 100% signal  
strength.  
decrease the signal strength. You anything. If not, you may wish to purchase a larger diameter dish  
will most likely not be able to get for your satellite antenna. Call your local satellite dealer or the  
the signal strength to 100%.  
Service Center for more information.  
No matter what you try, Cable connectors may have  
Confirm that all cable connectors are firmly connected and dry.  
you cannot get the  
Signal Strength bar  
green.  
loosened or have moisture inside. Call the Service Center for assistance.  
There may be interference with the  
satellite signal.  
The recorder displays  
the message, “Acquiring plugged in, and is acquiring the  
Satellite Signal.”  
The recorder may have just been  
Wait a few minutes to see if the message is removed.  
Confirm that the Signal Strength bar is green and displays the  
word “Locked.” If not, re-aim the satellite antenna.  
Confirm that all cables are firmly connected and dry.  
satellite signal.  
The satellite antenna may have  
been moved out of alignment with Clean off the dish.  
the satellite signal.  
Call the Service Center for assistance.  
Connecting cables may have  
loosened or have moisture inside.  
There may be interference with the  
satellite signal.  
Your dish may be wet from rain, or  
full of snow or debris.  
You notice some  
settings are changed  
from what you have  
previously set.  
Satellite channel reception may  
have deteriorated temporarily.  
When reception deteriorates temporarily and recovers on its own  
while receiving a satellite channel, check to make sure that  
previously-set settings are retained correctly. If not, reset them  
again.  
Page A-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User and  
Installation Guide  
USE THE REMOTE CONTROL  
What Is  
Possible Why  
What to Do  
Happening  
You cannot find the  
remote control.  
Use the front panel control buttons to operate the recorder until  
you find the remote.  
If the remote control is permanently lost or too damaged to use,  
call the Service Center to order a replacement.  
When you press a  
The remote control may be missing If the batteries are missing or dead, insert four fresh AAA-size  
button on the remote  
control the behavior is  
batteries, the batteries may be  
incorrectly placed in the remote, or Make sure to re-initialize and reprogram the remote, including  
batteries.  
not as expected. Instead, the batteries may be weak or dead. resetting the remote address if necessary.  
you may see one of the If a button on the remote is pressed If the remote has fresh batteries, check whether they are placed  
following:  
that has no function for the active according to the label diagram. If not, remove them and place  
mode, the mode light may not  
flash.  
correctly.  
No mode light (SAT,  
TV, D-VHS or AUX)  
flashes.  
The remote changes to  
SAT mode.  
The other equipment  
does not respond.  
The mode lights may or  
may not flash.  
When you try to control The other equipment may not be  
Power the equipment ON. Reposition the remote so that it has a  
clear line-of-sight to the equipment.  
Check the remote batteries. If necessary, re-install and make sure  
they are firmly seated.When you press a button on the remote,  
equipment other than  
the recorder with the  
remote, the other  
equipment does not  
respond.  
powered ON.  
The remote may not be in the  
correct mode.  
If the remote is in the correct mode, note which of the remote mode lights flashes. If the remote is not  
it may not be programmed for this in the correct mode, press the Mode button until the correct mode  
particular brand of equipment.  
light flashes. Program the remote with the correct code for the  
The batteries may not be properly equipment. Try the Power Scan method, if necessary.  
installed.  
There may be a solid object  
between the remote and the  
equipment, or the remote is not  
aimed directly at the equipment.  
The remote control does  
not work when the  
remote is in the D-VHS  
mode.  
1. Turn the VCR's power OFF if its power is ON.  
2. Press the Mode button until the remote is in the D-VHS mode.  
3. Press the Address button. The D-VHS light blinks.  
4. Use the number pad buttons to enter "222".  
5. Press the Address button. The D-VHS light blinks.  
6. Load a cassette into the cassette loading slot. The VCR's  
power comes on automatically.  
7. Make sure that playback starts when the Play button is  
pressed. If playback does not start, repeat steps 1 through 7.  
Page A-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Problems and Solutions Tables  
A
When you try to control The remote control may be missing If the batteries are missing or dead, insert four fresh AAA-size  
the recorder with the  
remote, the recorder  
does not respond (this  
may occur especially  
after changing the  
batteries, the batteries may be  
batteries.  
incorrectly placed in the remote, or If the batteries have just been replaced or taken out and reset, you  
the batteries may be weak or dead. may need to reset the remote address for the recorder before the  
You may need to reset the remote recorder will respond. In this case, you also need to reprogram  
address and reprogram the remote the remote for all components, including the TV, VCR and other  
batteries in the remote). for the other equipment. The  
addresses for the recorder and the To readdress the recorder to the remote: If the recorder is on,  
remote may not match. turn it off and wait 15 seconds. Press the Info button on the  
If you have a UHF remote, signals recorder to display the Important System Information menu.  
from a neighbor’s UHF remote Press the Record button on the remote.  
equipment controlled by the remote.  
may be blocking signals from your To prevent UHF signal interference, you may reduce the  
remote from reaching the recorder. sensitivity of the recorder to UHF signals by installing a UHF  
attenuator.  
When you press the  
Power button on the  
You may not be able to see that the Try other buttons to see if the recorder is responding.  
power light is on, if other lights in Replace the remote batteries with fresh ones.  
remote control to power the room are too bright.  
Reprogram the recorder and remote to the same address.  
the recorder ON, a mode The remote may not be operating  
Check that the electrical power is on in your building, and that it  
light flashes on the  
remote, but the Power  
light on the recorder  
does not illuminate.  
properly or the batteries are weak has the voltage and current specified for the recorder.  
or dead.  
The recorder may not be  
Check that the electrical outlet you are using is in good condition  
and has power (for example, check that a fuse has not blown).  
programmed to the remote address. Check that the recorder power cord is not damaged, and that the  
The recorder may not be plugged  
into a power outlet, or there is a  
problem with the power.  
plug is inserted correctly into the outlet.  
The recorder turns ON The recorder is responding to  
Change the address of your remote control and recorder.  
or OFF or does anything signals from another nearby remote  
else, without you  
control.  
pressing any buttons.  
PROGRAM SOUND  
What Is  
Happening  
Possible Why  
What to Do  
The recorder power  
You may have muted the sound, or Turn off the mute using the TV mute button, or by pressing the  
Mute button on the remote. If necessary, change to the  
good picture on the TV The audio connections may not be appropriate mode before pressing Mute.  
light is on and there is a set the volume to be inaudible.  
set, but you do not hear properly connected.  
any sound.  
Turn up the volume at the TV, or by pressing the Volume (+)  
button on the remote.  
Check the audio connectors and cords from the recorder to the  
TV, or to any other sound system you may be using.  
Check the TV speakers or other sound system you may be using.  
A foreign language is  
used for the audio  
sound.  
The recorder may have been  
programmed to select an alternate Setup menu) to select the language you prefer.  
audio language.  
Use the Alternate Audio Language menu (within the System  
Note that some languages listed may not be available at this time.  
Page A-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User and  
Installation Guide  
VIEWING A PROGRAM ON THE TELEVISION SCREEN  
What Is  
Possible Why  
Happening  
What to Do  
The TV/VCR button on  
the remote does not  
work.  
This button works only when the recorder is wired using only the  
RF or VHF connections. Remember that with any wiring setup,  
you can use the Local TV Link feature to select local broadcast or  
cable channels.  
The recorder power  
light is on, but the TV  
image is:  
The TV set may not be operating  
properly.  
If the TV and the recorder are  
operating properly, there may be  
Make sure that the TV set is plugged into an electrical outlet, and  
that the cord, plug and outlet are in good operating condition.  
Make sure the outlet has electrical power. Make sure that the TV  
is turned on.  
black (no picture), is interference with the satellite  
frozen, has breakups signal.  
in the image, or  
shows multicolored  
squares.  
If you connected the recorder to the TV using only the RF or  
VHF connections, make sure that the TV is tuned to channel 3 or  
4 (whichever works best in your area) and that the Chan. 3/4  
Setup is set to the same channel as the TV. Make sure that the  
TV brightness and contrast are adjusted correctly.  
Make sure that the TV is connected properly to the recorder.  
Check that your system has been installed correctly. Verify that  
all required coaxial cables are in place, and check that all cable  
connectors are firmly connected.  
Make sure that your satellite antenna is aimed at the satellites.  
Check the strength of the signal in the Point Dish and Signal  
Strength menu. Re-aim the antenna, if necessary, to obtain  
maximum signal strength.  
Note your local weather conditions. Heavy rain, snow, or cloud  
cover may be interfering with transmission of the satellite signal.  
Remove any snow or other debris which may have collected on  
the satellite antenna.  
The recorder power  
light is on, and there is a properly.  
The TV set may not be operating  
Make sure that the TV brightness and contrast are adjusted  
correctly, and that the TV is working properly.  
picture on the TV  
screen, but the picture: TV using only the RF or VHF  
If you connect the recorder to the  
Make sure that the TV is connected properly to the recorder.  
Check other nearby electrical equipment as possible sources of  
connections, there may be a strong interference. Verify that all required coaxial cables are in place.  
has sparkles or is  
grainy; or  
has a herringbone  
pattern; or  
local broadcast on the same or  
adjacent channel to the one  
to which the RF or VHF is tuned.  
There may be interference from  
Check for moisture or water leaking in all connections. Dry out  
if needed, then seal with coaxial cable sealant after reconnection.  
Check antenna-to-recorder cable run length; if over 100 feet,  
install a line amplifier.  
lacks color or  
vertical hold, or  
wobbles, or  
looks “washed out”  
or fuzzy.  
other nearby electrical equipment Make sure that the satellite antenna is aimed at the satellites.  
(such as cellular telephones,  
computers, microwave ovens,  
radios, stereos, or TVs).  
Check the strength of the signal in the Point Dish and Signal  
Strength menu. Re-aim the antenna if necessary, to obtain  
maximum signal strength. Check the antenna mount, tightening  
bolts if needed.  
The satellite antenna may have  
shifted, losing signal strength.  
SYSTEM FEATURES  
What Is  
Happening  
Possible Why  
What to Do  
You were in the middle The menu system has a time-out  
of doing something in a feature that closes the menu after  
Start your procedure again.  
menu, and it suddenly  
several minutes of no activity.  
closed, taking you back This will discard any changes you  
to the program you were have made.  
viewing.  
Page A-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Problems and Solutions Tables  
A
PROGRAM GUIDE OR BROWSE BANNER  
What Is  
Happening  
Possible Why  
What to Do  
You try to display future The Program Guide and Browse  
Try using the Program Guide or Browse Banner again later. By  
programs in the  
Banner can only display programs that time, they may display programs for the time and date you  
Program Guide or  
Browse Banner, but  
find you cannot display  
past a limited time.  
scheduled for a limited time  
beyond the present.  
want.  
You try to display past The Program Guide and Browse  
programs (programs that Banner can only display programs  
have ended) in the  
Program Guide or  
Browse Banner, but  
you cannot find.  
that have not yet ended. These  
features cannot display a time  
earlier than the present.  
When you are using the You have a Favorites List active  
You can change the active Favorites List while still in the  
Program Guide, by pressing the Guide button on the remote.  
You can choose another custom Favorites List or the “ALL  
CHAN” list, which includes all the channels.  
Program Guide or  
other than the list named “ALL  
CHAN.”  
Browse Banner, some  
channels are missing.  
CHANGING CHANNELS  
What Is  
Happening  
Possible Why  
What to Do  
You enter the channel  
number you want. The entering the channel number. Or,  
channel changes, but the the channel number you entered  
You may have made a mistake  
Carefully retry entering the channel number you want.  
Call the Service Center to make sure you have purchased the  
channel.  
new channel is not  
exactly the channel you If so, the channel displayed is the  
entered. You are closest possible to the channel you  
channeling up or down entered.  
may be invalid.  
Choose “ALL CHAN” as the active Favorites List.  
through the channels,  
and the system is  
If you were viewing a program and  
entered a number to a channel that  
skipping channels that you have not purchased, the  
you know you have  
purchased.  
recorder will change to the  
unpurchased program and display a  
message. If a Favorites List other  
than “ALL CHAN” is active, the  
recorder will skip channels not on  
the active list.  
You can't change  
There may be a recording in  
Press the Pause button to temporarily stop recording, then  
channels even though  
you enter the channel  
progress. This is a safety measure change channels, and press the Play button to resume recording.  
to prevent the channel being  
number you want or use changed by mistake during  
the Up/Down buttons.  
recording.  
Page A-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User and  
Installation Guide  
ELECTRONIC MAIL  
What Is  
Possible Why  
What to Do  
Happening  
Previously you read  
The recorder may have deleted  
Delete messages as soon as you have read them, unless they are  
messages which are now some old messages because it ran important enough to save.  
missing.  
out of memory space for new  
messages.  
The Power light on the The recorder has received mail.  
recorder is flashing.  
Read the mail and the light will stop flashing.  
FAVORITES LISTS  
What Is  
Possible Why  
Happening  
What to Do  
You highlight the “ALL The system will not allow you to  
Choose another list to modify.  
CHAN” list and then  
highlight either the  
Modify List or Clear  
option. The recorder  
displays an ERROR  
message.  
modify the “ALL CHAN” list.  
You highlight an empty The system will not allow you to  
Choose another list to use.  
list and then highlight  
the Save option. The  
recorder displays an  
ERROR message.  
make an empty list active.  
You want to add a  
channel to a Favorites  
List, but the Favorites  
List is full.  
You have the maximum number of You must delete a channel from that Favorites List to make room  
channels in your Favorites List. for the new channel.  
USE SECURITY SYSTEM  
What Is  
Happening  
Possible Why  
What to Do  
You set a specific lock You have not locked the recorder. You must lock the recorder for any specific lock to take effect.  
(for example, a lock on  
programs by ratings),  
but the lock does not  
seem to prevent  
viewing.  
You forgot your  
Call the Service Center. You may need to provide the Service  
Center Representative with the following information: (1) your  
name; (2) your address; (3) your telephone number; (4) your  
recorder serial identification number; and (5) your Service Center  
Personal Identification Number (PIN), if used.  
password, so that you  
are unable to unlock  
your recorder.  
Page A-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Problems and Solutions Tables  
A
TELEPHONE LINE PROBLEMS  
What Is  
Happening  
Possible Why  
What to Do  
During a telephone call, The recorder may have tried to call You do not have to do anything.  
you hear clicks.  
the Service Center on the telephone  
line. When it registered that the  
telephone was busy, it  
automatically disconnected.  
You pick up the  
telephone to make a  
The recorder was in the middle of a Press the telephone receiver button to hang up. Release the  
call to the Service Center. When it button to get a dial tone.  
call, but you do not hear registered that the telephone was  
a dial tone.  
picked up, it automatically  
disconnected.  
Your computer or fax  
The recorder was in the middle of a Resend the fax or modem call.  
attempts to send a fax or call to the Service Center. When it  
modem call, but fails.  
registered that a call was attempted  
on the telephone, it automatically  
disconnected. The fax or modem  
registered that there is no dial tone,  
and canceled the send.  
Your computer or fax  
was receiving a fax or  
The recorder may have tried to call Have the sender resend the fax or modem call.  
the Service Center on the telephone  
modem call, but an error line during the fax or modem call.  
occurred.  
When it registered that the  
telephone was busy, it  
automatically disconnected. The  
resulting clicks corrupted the fax or  
modem call.  
ERROR MESSAGES IN THE MENUS  
What Is  
Possible Why  
What to Do  
Happening  
You see an “ERROR”  
message on your TV  
screen.  
When the system encounters a  
problem, it displays an error  
message on the TV screen.  
In most cases, the ERROR message explains the error. Occasion-  
ally, the ERROR message requests that you do something;  
however, typically all you need to do is select the OK option on  
the ERROR message to clear the message from your TV screen.  
ERROR message text: You may try to enter your password Wait until several minutes have passed, and try again.  
“The number of  
password entry retries  
has been exceeded.  
three times. If you do not enter the  
correct password any of those  
times, then you must wait several  
Please try again later.” minutes until you may try again.  
ERROR message text: You or someone else placed a lock Use the remote control to unlock the front panel buttons.  
“The front panel buttons on the recorder front panel buttons.  
are locked.”  
ERROR message text: The recorder is not receiving a  
Check the condition of all the coaxial cables and cable connec-  
“Unable to acquire  
signal.” or “Unable to  
acquire program guide  
information.”  
strong enough signal to maintain an tions in your system. Check the condition of the antenna  
uninterrupted, clean picture.  
mounting and aiming, and re-aim the antenna if needed. If the  
system is OK, then there may be a weather-related problem with  
transmission of the satellite signal.  
Page A-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User and  
Installation Guide  
ATTENTION: “Your  
Smart Card does not  
currently have  
There is a problem with the  
Program Guide information  
transmitted to your recorder via the channel.  
You cannot watch the selected program, even though it is  
displayed in the Program Guide. Try a different program or  
authorization to view or satellites.  
purchase this program.  
Please wait or channel  
up or down.”  
ATTENTION:  
“Acquiring satellite  
signal.”  
The recorder was just plugged in, Wait a few minutes to see if the message is removed. Confirm  
and is acquiring the satellite signal. that the Signal Strength bar in the Point Dish and Signal  
The satellite antenna may have  
moved out of alignment with the  
satellite signal.  
Strength menu is green and is displaying the word “Locked.” If  
it is not, re-aim the satellite antenna.Confirm that all the cables  
are firmly connected and dry. Clean out the dish, call the Service  
Center for assistance.  
Connecting cables may have  
loosened or have moisture inside.  
The dish may be full of snow or  
debris.  
There is interference with the  
satellite signal.  
DIAGNOSTIC TEST  
What Is  
Happening  
Possible Why  
What to Do  
You are doing a Front  
Panel or Remote  
You pressed the Power button on  
either the front panel or the remote return to the Diagnostics menu. You can now resume the test,  
Turn the recorder back ON, and use the on-screen menus to  
Control Diagnostic Test, control.  
and the recorder turns  
OFF.  
but remember not to press the Power button.  
You are doing a Front  
Panel Diagnostic Test,  
The front panel buttons are not  
working correctly.  
Call the Service Center for assistance.  
and the recorder displays Note: The front panel button lock  
a failure message. has no effect on this test.  
You are doing a Remote You pressed the Address button, or The Remote Control Diagnostic Test does not cover the Address  
Control Diagnostic Test, any of the VCR control buttons.  
and the recorder does  
button or the VCR control buttons.  
not respond when you  
press a remote button.  
You are doing a Remote You pressed the Cancel button.  
Control Diagnostic Test,  
and the recorder  
Pressing the Cancel button returns the recorder to the  
Diagnostics menu. Select the Remote Control option to resume  
the test, but remember not to press the Cancel button.  
displays the  
Diagnostics menu.  
You are doing a Remote The remote control may be missing If the batteries are missing or dead, insert four fresh AAA-size  
Control Diagnostic Test, batteries, the batteries may be  
batteries. Note: You may need to reset the remote address for the  
and the recorder  
displays a failure  
message.  
incorrectly placed in the remote, or recorder before the recorder will respond.  
the batteries may be weak or dead. To prevent UHF signal interference, you may reduce the  
If you have a UHF remote, signals sensitivity of the recorder to UHF signals by installing a UHF  
from a neighbor’s UHF remote  
attenuator.  
may be blocking signals from your If the remote is damaged or defective, call the Service Center for  
remote from reaching the recorder. assistance.  
The remote control may be  
damaged or defective.  
Page A-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Problems and Solutions Tables  
A
You are doing a Dish  
The satellite antenna may have  
Re-aim the satellite antenna, to obtain maximum signal strength.  
Signal Diagnostic Test, been moved out of alignment with Check the antenna mount, tightening bolts if needed.  
and the recorder  
displays a failure  
message.  
the satellite signal.  
Connecting cables may have  
loosened, or have moisture inside. or cloud cover) may interrupt the satellite signal.  
Check that all cables are firmly connected and dry.  
A variety of atmospheric factors (in particular, heavy rain, snow,  
There may be interference with the Check whether the dish is full of snow or debris, and clean it out  
satellite signal.  
if necessary.  
The dish may be full of snow or  
debris.  
Call the Service Center for assistance.  
You are doing a  
The recorder cannot get a dial tone Check the Telephone Jack connection on the recorder back  
Telephone Connection through the telephone connection. panel, the telephone line, and the line connection to a telephone  
Diagnostic Test, and the  
recorder displays a  
failure message.  
connection.  
Make sure that the telephone line is connected to an active  
telephone connection.  
Make sure that no one else is using the telephone line while you  
do the test.  
Call your local telephone company for assistance.  
You are doing a Main  
Unit Diagnostic Test,  
and the recorder  
displays a failure  
message.  
The recorder may have been  
damaged or be defective.  
Call the Service Center for assistance.  
CALLER ID  
What Is  
Happening  
Possible Why  
What to Do  
You receive a telephone Your recorder or your television  
call, but your recorder may be turned off. Your recorder  
Make sure that both the recorder and the television are turned on.  
Make sure that the recorder is properly connected to an active  
does not display a Caller may not be connected to an active telephone connection.  
ID message on your TV telephone connection. If you are recording a program using a VCR Event Timer, the  
screen. You may be recording a program  
using a VCR Event Timer.  
recorder will not display a caller ID message (so that the message  
does not appear on your video tape).  
You may not have purchased Caller You must purchase Caller ID from your telephone company (the  
ID from your telephone company. recorder displays caller ID information, but does not generate it).  
You may have disabled the Caller Re-enable the Caller ID feature.  
ID feature.  
Your recorder displays a The caller has blocked his or her  
Caller ID message with name or telephone number from  
As with caller ID equipment available from your local telephone  
company, the caller can block his or her name or number from  
being displayed.  
the caller’s telephone  
number but no name,  
name but no number, or  
with neither a number  
nor a name.  
being displayed.  
Page A-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User and  
Installation Guide  
EVENT TIMERS  
What Is  
Possible Why  
What to Do  
Happening  
You try to set up an  
event timer, but the  
recorder displays an  
ERROR message noting  
that the event is locked.  
You must enter the system  
password before you can create an system password.  
event timer for a locked event.  
To be able to set up an event timer for the event, first enter the  
You try to set up an  
event timer, but the  
recorder displays an  
ERROR message noting  
that the event is a pay  
per view event.  
You must order a pay per view  
event before you can create an  
event timer for it.  
To be able to set up an event timer for the event, first order it.  
You try to set up an  
event timer, but the  
recorder displays an  
ERROR message giving  
you the option to delete  
a previously set up  
event timer.  
You have already set up the  
maximum number of event timers. timers you previously set up.  
To be able to set up a new event timer, delete one of the event  
You set up an event  
timer, but your recorder Event Timer but what you should  
does not tune to the  
You may have set up a Reminder  
Remember that a Reminder Event Timer only reminds you that  
the event is about to start. An Auto-Tune Event Timer reminds  
have set up is an Auto-Tune Event you and tunes the recorder to the channel of the event.  
channel of the event, or Timer or a VCR Event Timer.  
A VCR Event Timer does all of the above and starts recording.  
does not record the  
event.  
You set up an event  
You may have set up a timer with Remember that a Once event timer executes only one time. A  
timer for an event that is an inappropriate frequency.  
repeated (such as a  
regularly scheduled  
Mon-Fri event timer executes Monday through Friday on the  
same channel at the same time. A Daily event timer does the  
same, Monday through Sunday. A Weekly event timer executes  
once a week on the same channel at the same time.  
program), but the timer  
does not execute for a  
showing of the event.  
You set up an event  
timer, but the timer does so that the event timer conflicted  
not execute at all. with another event timer.  
The event time may have changed If the recorder is ON and detects an event timer conflict, it will  
display the Event Timer Scheduling Conflict menu. You must  
delete one of the conflicting event timers.  
The event time may have changed No event timer will execute if the event time changes by more  
by more than twenty-four hours.  
than twenty-four hours.  
You set up a Once event The event time changed.  
A Once event timer always executes at the actual time of the  
timer, but the timer  
executes at a different  
time.  
event.  
You stop the execution Stopping the event timer applies  
To stop all executions of a repeated event timer, you must delete  
of an event timer for one only to the current showing of the the event timer. Note that a Once event timer is automatically  
showing of an event that event.  
is repeated (such as a  
regularly scheduled  
program), but the timer  
executes for the next  
showing.  
deleted when it executes.  
You set up an event  
timer, but your recorder outage during recording.  
stopped recording before  
There may have been a power  
During recording (including ITR and EVENT TIMERS), if there  
is an interruption in the power supply (as caused by power  
outages), recording will stop and will not resume automatically.  
the event finished.  
Page A-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Problems and Solutions Tables  
A
ADD LOCAL OR CABLE CHANNELS TO THE PROGRAM GUIDE  
What Is  
Happening  
Possible Why  
What to Do  
A desired local or cable You have not yet added the channel You must add all desired local or cable channels to the Program  
channel does not appear to the Program Guide.  
in the Program Guide.  
Guide. Note that you cannot add both local and cable channels.  
A desired local  
broadcast or cable  
channel appears in the  
You may have added local  
broadcast channels and then  
selected one of the Cable Channels the channels on the list would not be correct for the option you  
If you add one type of channels and then select another option,  
the Selected Local Channels list will not change. In that case,  
Program Guide, but the options, or added cable channels  
programming on the and then selected the Broadcast  
channel does not match Channels option.  
selected. Whenever you change the option, you should edit the  
Selected Local Channels list.  
Contact your cable TV provider for information on the Standard  
HRC, and IRC cable systems, and for help in choosing the  
appropriate Cable Channels option.  
published schedules.  
You may have selected an  
inappropriate Cable Channels  
option.  
A desired local  
broadcast or cable  
channel appears in the  
Your TV may not be operating  
properly.  
The connections in your system  
Make sure that your TV is working properly, and that the  
brightness, contrast, and tuning are adjusted correctly. Make sure  
that the TV is connected properly to your recorder.  
Program Guide, but the may be faulty.  
reception of the channel Your TV antenna may need to be  
Verify that all required coaxial cables are in place. Check for  
moisture or water leakage in all connections. Dry out if needed,  
then seal with coaxial cable sealant after reconnection. Check  
is poor or absent.  
re-aimed.  
Other nearby electrical equipment antenna-to-recorder cable run length; if over 100 feet, install a  
(such as cellular telephones,  
computers, microwave ovens,  
radios, stereos, or TVs) may be  
causing interference.  
line amplifier.  
Make sure that the TV antenna is aimed properly.  
Note your local weather conditions. Heavy rain, snow, or cloud  
cover may be interfering with transmission of signals.  
Check other nearby electrical equipment as possible sources of  
interference.  
You try to enter a  
channel number, but the number with fewer than three  
recorder does not  
respond.  
You may be entering a channel  
To enter a channel number with fewer than three digits, you must  
enter leading zeros. For example, enter 002 for channel 2, and  
010 for channel 10.  
digits, for example 2 or 10.  
You try to enter a  
channel name in the  
Edit Local Channel  
Name menu, but the  
recorder does not  
display the last  
You may have tried to enter more Remember that you can enter only a limited number of  
than the maximum number of  
characters.  
characters, including spaces, for a channel name. You may need  
to abbreviate the name.  
character(s) of the  
name.  
TAPE PLAYBACK AND RECORDING  
What Is  
Possible Why  
What to Do  
Happening  
The cassette gets stuck The cassette may have been  
partway during loading, inserted incorrectly.  
and is ejected.  
Make sure the window side is up, the rear label side is facing you  
and the arrow on the front of the cassette is pointing towards the  
recorder. Then insert the cassette.  
The tape stops during  
The Counter Memory function may Check to see whether there is a checkmark next to Counter  
rewind or fast forward. be turned on in the VCR Setup  
Memory in the VCR Setup screen's Options list. If there is,  
screen.  
remove the checkmark from the checkbox (see page. 5-14).  
Page A-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User and  
Installation Guide  
The tape is running but If you are using the RF OUT  
the picture won't appear connection (see page 7-22), the  
Set the channel selector to channel 3 or 4.  
on the TV screen.  
channel selector on the TV may be  
set incorrectly.  
If you are using the AV connection Set the TV receiver to its AV mode.  
or S-VIDEO connection (see page  
7-23, 24), the TV receiver may be  
set to the wrong mode.  
Breaks are noticeable in This may happen when automatic Adjust tracking manually (see page 5-10).  
the Hi-Fi soundtrack.  
tracking causes the monaural  
soundtrack to be reproduced during  
playback.  
The playback picture is The video heads may be dirty.  
blurred or interrupted,  
The heads must be cleaned. Call the Service Center for  
assistance and referral to a qualified JVC service technician.  
even though TV  
broadcasts are clear.  
The Hi-Fi soundtrack  
cannot be heard.  
The Audio option at the VCR Setup Choose "HI-FI" for the Audio in the VCR Setup screen (see page  
screen may be set incorrectly.  
5-13).  
Recording won't start.  
There may be no cassette loaded.  
The loaded cassette may have its  
record safety tab removed.  
Insert a cassette.  
Remove the cassette and cover the safety tab hole with adhesive  
tape, or load a cassette with its record safety tab intact.  
Tape-to-tape editing  
won't work.  
The recorder and a second VCR or Refer to the directions and the illustration in the Editing to or  
a camcorder may have been  
incorrectly connected.  
from Another VCR (see page 5-32) or Editing from a Camcorder  
(see page 5-33) to properly connect the units.  
The power to one or more of the  
Make sure the power to all units is turned on.  
units may not have been turned on. Select the recorder's input mode (see page 5-32, 33).  
The recorder's input mode may not  
have been selected.  
TIMER RECORDING  
What Is  
Happening  
Possible Why  
What to Do  
Timer recording won't  
work.  
There may be no cassette loaded.  
The loaded cassette may have its  
record safety tab removed.  
Load a cassette with the record safety tab intact (or with its  
record safety hole covered with adhesive tape).  
Remove the cassette and cover the safety tab hole with adhesive  
tape, or load a cassette with its record safety tab intact.  
During timer recording, The end of the tape was reached  
the cassette is automati- during timer recording.  
cally ejected, the power  
The program may not have been recorded in its entirety. Next  
time make sure you have enough time on the tape to record the  
entire program.  
is shut off and the  
TIMER light won't stop  
blinking.  
ATTENTION:  
This recorder contains microcomputers. External electronic noise or interference can cause  
a microcomputer to malfunction. If the recorder does not operate correctly, switch its  
power off and unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. Wait for a while and then plug  
the power back in. Eject and check the condition of the cassette. If everything appears  
normal, resume operating the recorder as usual.  
Page A-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Questions and Answers  
A
QUESTIONS AND ANSWERS  
PLAYBACK  
Q. What happens if the end of the tape is reached during playback or search?  
A. The tape is automatically rewound to the beginning.  
Q. Can the VCR indefinitely remain in the still mode?  
A. No. It stops automatically after 5 minutes to protect the heads.  
Q. During search, still and frame-by-frame playback, the picture is intermittent. What’s the  
cause?  
A. Picture loss occurs when these types of playback are attempted with a tape recorded in LP mode.  
Pressing PLAY to return to normal playback will restore the picture.  
Q. When returning from multi-speed search to normal playback, the picture is  
disturbed. Should I be concerned about this?  
A. No, it is normal.  
Q. Other than preventing further recording, what effect does removing the safety tab have?  
A. It disables marking or erasing of index codes.  
Q. Sometimes, during Index Search, the VCR can’t find the program I want to see. Why not?  
A. There may be index codes too close together.  
Q. During playback, on-screen operational indicators sometimes jitter. Why does this  
happen?  
A. If the condition of the tape being played back is not good, jittering of the video (including on-  
screen indicators) may occur.  
RECORDING  
Q. When I pause and then resume a recording, the end of the recording before the pause is  
overlapped by the new recording. Why does this happen?  
A. This is normal. It reduces distortion at the pause and resume points.  
Q. Can the VCR indefinitely remain in the Record-Pause mode?  
A. No. The VCR automatically goes to its Stop mode after 5 minutes to protect the heads. When  
paused during Instant Timer Recording (ITR), the VCR shuts off automatically after 5 minutes.  
Q. What happens if the tape runs out during recording?  
A. The VCR automatically rewinds it to the beginning.  
TIMER RECORDING  
Q. REC and TIMER remain lit on the front display panel. Is there a problem?  
A. No. This is a normal condition for a timer recording in progress.  
Q. Can I program the timer while I’m watching a tape or a TV broadcast?  
A. Yes, but while you are setting the timer you won't see the tape's or broadcast program's picture as  
it is replaced by the on-screen menu. The audio from the tape or broadcast program will be  
present during the setting of the timer.  
Page A-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User and  
Installation Guide  
SPECIFICATIONS  
GENERAL  
CONNECTOR  
Power requirement  
Power consumption : 50 W  
Temperature  
: AC 120 V` , 60 Hz  
Input/Output  
: RCA connectors (IN x 1,  
OUT x 2)  
S-VIDEO connectors  
(OUTx1)  
Operating  
Storage  
Operating position  
Dimensions  
(W x H x D)  
: 5°C to 40°C (41°F to 104°F)  
: –20°C to 60°C (–4°F to 140°F)  
: Horizontal only  
TUNER (D-VHS)  
Signal STD  
Input frequency  
Wave form  
Symbol rate  
Bandwidth  
DBS monitor  
(as recording VHF or  
UHF)  
: DVB  
: 400 x 142 x 350 mm  
(15-3/4" x 5-5/8" x 13-13/16")  
: 7.9 kg (17.5 lbs)  
: 950 – 1450 MHz  
: QPSK demodulator  
: 1 – 20 MS/s  
: 2 –27 MHz  
Weight  
Maximum recording  
time  
D-VHS  
: 420 min. with DF-420  
video cassette  
: Under study  
VHS (SP)  
VHS (EP)  
: 210 min. with T-210  
video cassette  
: 630 min. with T-210  
video cassette  
TUNER (VHS)  
Tuning system  
Channel coverage  
VHF  
UHF  
RF output  
: Frequency-synthesized tuner  
: Channels 2 – 13  
VIDEO/AUDIO (D-VHS)  
: Channels 14 – 69  
: Channel 3 or 4 (switchable;  
preset to Channel 3 when  
shipped) 75 ohms,  
unbalanced  
Format  
: MPEG2 standard mode  
Track composition  
Tape speed  
Head azimuth  
Drum rotation  
Tracking system  
Recording specification  
: 16.67 mm/sec  
: ؓ30 deg  
: 1800 rpm  
: CTL track system  
TIMER  
Clock reference  
Program capacity  
: Quartz  
: 1-year programmable timer/  
10 programs  
Main data input rate : 14.1 Mbps  
Sub data input rate : 0.146 Mbps  
Recording rate  
Track structure  
: 19.14 Mbps  
: 1 sector  
ACCESSORIES  
Length of sync block: 112 bytes  
Inner ECC  
Outer ECC  
Code word shuffling : 6 tracks  
Modulation system : SI-NRZI  
: RS code  
: RS code  
Provided accessories : RF cable (F-type)  
Remote control unit  
"AAA" battery x 4  
Power cord  
S-Video cable (4-pin)  
Audio/Video cable  
Smart card (pre-installed in  
recorder)  
Telephone cord  
UHF antenna  
D-VHS tape (DF-180)  
Antenna kit  
(HM-DSR100DU only)  
VIDEO/AUDIO (VHS)  
Format  
: VHS NTSC standard  
Signal system  
: NTSC-type color signal  
and EIA monochrome  
signal, 525 lines/60 fields  
Recording/  
Playback system  
: DA-4 (Double Azimuth)  
head helical scan system  
Signal-to-noise ratio : 45 dB  
Horizontal resolution : 240 lines  
Frequency range  
Specifications shown are for SP mode unless otherwise  
specified.  
E. & O.E. Design and specifications subject to change  
without notice.  
Normal audio  
Hi-Fi audio  
: 70 Hz to 10,000 Hz  
: 20 Hz to 20,000 Hz  
Page A-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
For Servicing  
A
FOR SERVICING  
HOW TO LOCATE YOUR JVC SERVICE CENTER  
TOLL FREE: 1-800-252-5722  
Dear customer:  
In order to receive the most satisfaction from your purchase, read the instruction booklet before operating the unit. In  
the event that repair is necessary, or for the address nearest your location, please refer to the factory service center list  
below or within the Continental United States, call 1-800-252-5722 for your authorized servicer. Remember to retain  
your Bill of Sale for Warranty Service.  
— JVC  
JVC SERVICE & ENGINEERING  
COMPANY OF AMERICA  
DIVISION OF US JVC CORP.  
FACTORY SERVICE CENTER LOCATIONS  
107 Little Falls Road  
Fairfield, NJ 07004-2105  
(973) 808-9279  
1500 Lakes Parkway  
Lawrenceville, GA 30243-5857  
(770) 339-2522  
705 Enterprise Street  
Aurora, IL 60504-8135  
(630) 851-7855  
5665 Corporate Avenue  
Cypress, CA 90630-4727  
(714) 229-8011  
10700 Hammerly Boulevard, Suite 110  
Houston, TX 77043-2310  
(713) 935-9331  
2969 Mapunapuna Place, Suite 101  
Honolulu, HI 96819-2000  
(808) 833-5828  
230 Eliot Street  
Ashland, MA 01721-2377  
(508) 881-5923  
8192 W State Road 84  
Davie, FL 33324-4611  
(954) 472-1960  
890 Dubuque Avenue  
South San Francisco, CA 94080-1804  
(415) 871-2666  
Sophisticated electronic products may require occasional service. Just as quality is a keyword in the engineering and  
production of the wide array of JVC products, service is the key to maintaining the high level performance for which JVC  
is world famous. The JVC service and engineering organization stands behind our products.  
NATIONAL HEADQUARTERS  
JVC SERVICE & ENGINEERING COMPANY OF AMERICA  
DIVISION OF US JVC CORP.  
107 Little Falls Road  
Fairfield, NJ 07004-2105  
Don't service it yourself.  
If you ship the product...  
CAUTION  
Pack your JVC unit in the original carton or one of  
equivalent size and strength. Enclose, with the unit, a  
letter stating the problem or symptom that exists and also  
a copy of the receipt or bill of sale you received when  
you purchased your JVC unit. Print your home return  
address on the outside and the inside of the carton. Send  
to the appropriate JVC Factory Service Center as listed  
above.  
To prevent electrical shock, do not open the cabinet. No  
user serviceable parts inside.  
Refer servicing to qualified service personnel.  
ACCESSORIES  
To purchase accessories for your JVC product, you may  
contact your local JVC Dealer.  
Or from the 48 Continental United States call toll free:  
1-800-882-2345.  
Page A-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User and  
Installation Guide  
WARRANTY  
LIMITED WARRANTY  
CONSUMER VIDEO 1-90  
JVC COMPANY OFAMERICA warrants this product and all parts thereof, except as set forth below ONLY TO THE  
ORIGINAL PURCHASERAT RETAILto be FREE FROM DEFECTIVE MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIPfrom the  
date of original retail purchase for the period as shown below. ("The Warranty Period")  
PARTS  
LABOR  
1
YR  
90  
DAYS  
THIS LIMITED WARRANTY IS VALID ONLY IN THE FIFTY (50) UNITED STATES, THE DISTRICT OF COLUMBIA  
AND IN COMMONWEALTH OF PUERTO RICO.  
WHAT WE WILL DO:  
If this product is found to be defective, JVC will repair or replace defective parts at no charge to the original owner.  
Such repair and replacement services shall be rendered by JVC during normal business hours at JVC authorized  
service centers. Parts used for replacement are warranted only for the remainder of the Warranty Period. All products  
and parts thereof may be brought to a JVC authorized service center on a carry-in basis except for Television sets  
having a screen size 25 inches and above which are covered on an in-home basis.  
WHAT YOU MUST DO FOR WARRANTY SERVICE:  
Return your product to a JVC authorized service center with a copy of your bill of sale. For your nearest JVC  
authorized service center, please call toll free: (800) 252-5722.  
If service is not available locally, box the product carefully, preferably in the original carton, and ship, insured, with a  
copy of your bill of sale plus a letter of explanation of the problem to the nearest JVC Factory Service Center, the  
name and location of which will be given to you by the toll-free number.  
If you have any questions concerning your JVC Product, please contact our Customer Relations Department.  
WHAT IS NOT COVERED:  
This limited warranty provided by JVC does not cover:  
1. Products which have been subject to abuse, accident, alteration, modification, tampering, negligence, misuse,  
faulty installation, lack of reasonable care, or if repaired or serviced by anyone other than a service facility authorized  
by JVC to render such service, or if affixed to any attachment not provided with the products, or if the model or  
serial number has been altered, tampered with, defaced or removed;  
2. Initial installation and installation and removal for repair;  
3. Operational adjustments covered in the Owner's Manual, normal maintenance, video and audio head cleaning;  
4. Damage that occurs in shipment, due to act of God, and cosmetic damage;  
5. Signal reception problems and failures due to line power surge;  
6. Video Pick-up Tubes/CCD Image Sensor, Cartridge, Stylus (Needle) are covered for 90 days from the date of  
purchase;  
7. Programming fees payable to your service provider if the product is removed for repair or replacement.  
8. Accessories;  
9. Batteries (except that Rechargeable Batteries are covered for 90 days from the date of purchase); from the date  
of purchase);  
There are no other express warranties except as listed above.  
THE DURATION OF ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING THE IMPLIED WARRANTY OF  
MERCHANTABILITY, IS LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THE EXPRESS WARRANTY HEREIN.  
JVC SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR THE LOSS OF USE OF THE PRODUCT, INCONVENIENCE, LOSS OR ANY  
OTHER DAMAGES, WHETHER DIRECT, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL (INCLUDING, WITHOUT  
LIMITATION, DAMAGE TO TAPES, RECORDS OR DISCS) RESULTING FROM THE USE OF THIS PRODUCT,  
OR ARISING OUT OF ANY BREACH OF THIS WARRANTY. ALL EXPRESS AND IMPLIED WARRANTIES,  
INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE  
LIMITED TO THE WARRANTY PERIOD SET FORTH ABOVE.  
Some states do not allow the exclusion of incidental or consequential dameges or limitations on how long an implied  
warranty lasts, so these limitations or exclusions may not apply to you. This warranty gives you specific legal rights  
and you may also have other rights which vary from state to state.  
JVC COMPANY OF AMERICA  
DIVISION OF US JVC CORP.  
41 Slater Drive  
Elmwood Park, New Jersey 07407  
REFURBISHED PRODUCTS CARRYA SEPARATE WARRANTY, THIS WARRANTY DOES NOT APPLY. FOR DETAILS  
OF REFURBISHED PRODUCT WARRANTY, PLEASE REFER TO THE REFURBISHED PRODUCT WARRANTY  
INFORMATION PACKAGED WITH EACH REFURBISHED PRODUCT.  
For customer use:  
Enter below the Model No. and Serial No. which is located either on the rear, bottom or side of the cabinet. Retain this information for  
future reference.  
Model No.:  
Serial No.:  
Purchase date:  
Name of dealer:  
Page A-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
I
FF/Browse 2-12  
Guide 2-10  
A
Index 2-12  
Info 2-2, 2-11  
Locking the Receiver Buttons 4-23  
Menu 2-2, 2-10  
Mode 2-9  
Mute 2-10  
Number Pad 2-12  
Pause 2-13  
Play 2-13  
Power 2-1, 2-9  
Recall 2-13  
Record 2-13  
Remote Control 2-7  
Rewind 2-13  
Rew/Browse 2-12  
Select 2-2, 2-11  
Skip 2-12  
About Cabling and Connections 7-18  
About Satellite Television 1-2  
Access Door 2-1  
Accessory Jack 2-4  
Adding Local or Cable Channels 3-14  
Address Button 2-12  
Address, Remote  
UHF Remote Address 2-8  
Aiming the Antenna for the Strongest Signal 7-12  
Antenna Components 6-4  
Antenna, Broadcast TV 3-13  
Antenna, Satellite 2-14, 6-4  
Appendix A-1  
Attaching the Cable to the Grounding Block 7-10  
Attenuator, UHF 4-41  
Audio Connection A-7  
Audio List 5-13  
Audio Sound 1-4  
Stop 2-13  
TV/VCR 2-3, 2-9  
Unlocking the Recorder Buttons 4-24  
UP/Down/Left/Right Arrows 2-2, 2-10  
View 2-11  
Automatic Tracking 5-10  
AUX 5-33  
Auxiliary Phono (RCA) Audio/Video Input 2-3  
Available Programming Services 1-5  
Azimuth 6-10, A-7  
Volume 2-10  
C
B
Cable TV Box Codes 4-45  
Back Panel 2-4  
Cabling and Connections 7-18  
Caller Identification (Caller ID) 5-20  
Cancel Button 2-12  
Canceling a Procedure 3-5  
Cassette Adapter 5-2  
Accessory Jack 2-4  
AC-3 (Dolby Digital Output) 2-6  
Channel 3/4 Switch 2-5  
High Speed Data Port 2-6  
Satellite Ant. In 2-4  
Changing Channels 3-4  
S-VIDEO Output 2-5  
Channeling Up or Down 3-4, A-7  
Via the Browse Banner 4-5  
Via the Program Guide 4-9  
Changing Modes on the Remote 3-2  
Changing the Name of a Favorites List 4-17  
Changing the System Password 4-27  
Channel Locks 4-20  
Channel Order 4-35  
Channel Surfing 3-4, A-7  
Channeling Up or Down 3-4, A-7  
Channels  
Telephone Jack 2-6  
VHF/UHF Ant. In (RF or VHF Connection) 2-4  
Phono (RCA) Audio/Video Output 2-5  
RF Out (RF or VHF Connection) 2-5  
UHF Remote Antenna 2-5  
Batteries, Remote 6-8  
Before You Start Installation 6-3  
Blacked-Out Program A-7  
Brick Mounting the Satellite Antenna 6-15  
Broadcast TV Antenna 3-13  
Browse Banner 4-3, 4-4  
Changing Channels 4-5  
Closing 4-5  
Adding Local or Cable Channels 3-14  
Changing Channels 3-4  
Channel Order 4-35  
Channeling Up or Down 3-4  
Deleting a Channel from the Selected Channels  
List 3-17  
Opening 4-4  
Viewing Banner Information for Other Channels 4-4  
Buttons  
Address 2-12  
Editing the Name of a Channel 3-19  
Selecting in a Favorites List 4-15  
Using a Favorites List to Filter 4-18  
Using Ch 000 in the Channels List 3-18  
Cinder Block, Mounting the Satellite Antenna 6-17  
Clear Line of Sight 6-11  
Auto Track 2-12  
Cancel 2-12  
Counter Reset 2-13  
Fast Forward 2-13  
Page I-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User and  
Installation Guide  
Coaxial Cable Connections 2-4, 7-11, 7-19  
Codes, Cable TV Box 4-45  
Codes, Television 4-44  
Codes, Tuners/Amplifiers 4-45  
Codes, VCR 4-45  
F
Factory Default Settings 4-28  
Fast Forward Button 2-3, 2-13  
Favorites Lists 1-4, 4-14  
Changing the Name of a Favorites List 4-17  
Creating or Modifying a Favorites List 4-15  
Making a Favorites List Active 4-18  
Selecting Channels 4-15  
FCC A-1  
Components of the Satellite Antenna 6-4  
Connections  
Accessory Jack 2-4  
AC-3 (Dolby Digital Output) 2-6  
Auxiliary Phono (RCA) Audio/Video Input 2-3  
High Speed Data Port 2-6  
Satellite Ant. In 2-4  
S-VIDEO Output 2-5  
Telephone Jack 2-6  
Features 1-4  
Highlights 1-1  
New Features 3-11  
Security 4-19  
VHF/UHF Ant. In (RF or VHF Connection) 2-4  
Phono (RCA) Audio/Video Output 2-5  
RF Out (RF or VHF Connection) 2-5  
UHF Remote Antenna 2-5  
Connections and Cabling 7-18  
Contents iv, v  
Contents of Installation Kit 6-7  
Contents of Package 6-3  
Counter Memory 5-14  
Federal Communication Commission (FCC)  
Compliance A-1  
Finding a Clear Line of Sight 6-11  
Finding the Direction and Elevation 6-10  
Finding the Satellites 6-9  
Fine-Tuning the Aim of the Satellite Antenna 7-12  
Flash Feature 4-31, A-7  
Flowchart of Menus 3-6  
Frame-by-Frame Playback 5-9  
Front Panel 2-1  
Counter Reset 5-14  
Customer Service A-25  
Access Door 2-1  
Auxiliary Phono (RCA) Audio/Video Input 2-3  
Cassette Loading Slot 2-1  
D-VHS Indicator 2-1  
Eject Button 2-3  
EP Light 2-2  
FF Button 2-3  
D
Daylight Savings 7-25  
Diagnostic Tests 4-36  
Direction 6-10, A-7  
Dual Output LNBF 6-4  
Info Button 2-2  
Menu Button 2-2  
Pause Button 2-3  
Pause Light 2-2  
E
Play Button 2-3  
Power Button 2-1  
Power Light 2-2  
Rec Button 2-3  
Rec Light 2-2  
Rew Button 2-3  
Select Button 2-2  
Stop Button 2-3  
Editing 5-33  
Electronic Mail 1-4, 4-30  
Reading Your Mail 4-30  
Elevation 6-10, A-7  
Entering the System Password 4-25  
Event A-7  
Event Timers 5-22  
Auto-Tune Event Timers 5-22  
Create a Manual Event Timer 5-26  
Create an Event Timer 5-24  
Daily Event Timers 5-25, 5-26  
Deleting a Conflicting Event Timer 5-29  
Deleting an Event Timer 5-29  
Frequency Choices 5-25, 5-26  
Maximum Number of Event Timers Allowed 5-29  
Mon-Fri Event Timers 5-25, 5-26  
Once Event Timers 5-25, 5-26  
Power Off and Event Timers 5-32  
Reminder Event Timers 5-22  
Restricted Programs and Event Timers 5-32  
Reviewing Event Timers 5-32  
Scheduling Conflicts 5-29  
Timer Light 2-2  
TV/VCR Button 2-3  
Up/Down/Left/Right Arrow Buttons 2-2  
Full Install 7-23  
G
Geosynchronous Orbit 1-2  
Getting Started 3-1  
Glossary A-7  
Grounding and Wiring the Satellite Antenna 7-8  
Grounding Block  
Attaching the Cable 7-10  
Installing 7-10  
Types of Event Timers 5-22  
VCR Event Timers 5-22  
Guide Button 2-10  
Weekly Event Timers 5-25, 5-26  
Page I-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INDEX  
I
Installing and Wiring Your System 7-1  
Installing Batteries in the Remote 6-8  
Installing the Antenna Mount 7-2  
Installing the Antenna on Metal Pole 7-6  
Installing the Grounding Block 7-10  
Installing the Satellite Antenna 7-1  
Introduction 1-1  
H
I
Hierarchy of Menus 3-6  
High Speed Data Port 2-6  
Highlighting a Choice in a List 3-8  
Highlighting a Menu Option 3-7  
ITR (Instant Timer Recording) 5-19  
IR A-8  
IR Remote 2-8  
Important System Information 7-17  
Index Search 5-8  
Info Button 2-2, 2-11  
L
Information  
Languages  
Service Center 1-1, A-25  
Viewing Programs in Other Languages 4-33  
Limited Warranty A-26  
Lists of Choices  
Highlighting 3-8  
Lists, Favorites 1-4, 4-14  
World Wide Web home page 1-1  
Infra-Red (IR) A-8  
Insert Cassette 5-2  
Installation  
Adding Local or Cable Channels 3-14  
Aiming the Antenna for the Strongest Signal 7-12  
Attaching the Cable to the Grounding Block 7-10  
Before You Start 6-3  
Changing Modes on the Remote 3-2  
Connecting the Recorder to a Telephone Line 7-15  
Deleting a Channel from the Selected Channels  
List 3-17  
LNBF 6-4, 7-18, A-8  
Dual Output 6-4  
Screw and Washers 6-5  
Single Output 6-4  
SupportArm 6-4  
Local TV Link 3-13, A-8  
Adding Local or Cable Channels 3-14  
Deleting a Channel from the Selected Channels  
List 3-17  
Finding a Clear Line of Sight 6-11  
Finding the Direction and Elevation 6-10  
Finding the Satellites 6-9  
Editing the Name of a Channel 3-19  
Using Ch 000 in the Channels List 3-18  
Your Broadcast TV Antenna 3-13  
Locating the Satellites Approximately 6-9  
Locking the System 4-25  
Fine-Tuning the Aim of the Satellite Antenna 7-12  
Grounding and Wiring the Satellite Antenna 7-8  
Installation and Setup Menu 3-11  
Installing the Antenna Mount 7-2  
Installing the Grounding Block 7-10  
Installing the Satellite Antenna 7-1  
Installing the Satellite Antenna on Metal Pole 7-6  
Introduction 6-1  
Low Noise Block Downconverter with Integrated  
Feedhorn (LNBF) 6-4  
M
Locating the Satellites Approximately 6-9  
Mounting Sites 6-13  
Manual Clock Setting 7-25  
Manual Tracking 5-10  
Mail, Electronic 1-4, 4-30  
Reading Your Mail 4-30  
Mast Assembly 6-5  
Menu Button 2-2, 2-10  
Menu Options 3-7  
Highlighting 3-7, 3-8  
Menu Structure 3-6  
Mounting the Antenna on Brick 6-15  
Mounting the Antenna on Cinder Block 6-17  
Mounting the Antenna on Siding 6-16  
Mounting the Antenna on the Roof 6-18  
Mounting the Antenna on Wood 6-19  
Ordering Your Programming 7-17  
Programming the Remote Control 4-39  
Programming the Remote for Other Equipment 4-39  
Remote Control Power Scan 4-41  
Safety Recommendations 6-13, 6-14  
Setting Parental and System Locks 4-19  
Setting the Remote Address 3-2  
Summary 6-2  
Menus 1-4  
About Menus and Other Multiple-Choice  
Screens 3-6  
Displaying 3-7  
Exiting 3-5  
Unpacking and Checking Contents 6-3  
Weather and Wind Considerations 6-13  
What You Need 6-6  
Important System Information 7-17  
Installation and Setup 3-11  
Main Menu 3-10  
What You Need to Have 6-6  
Menu Options 3-7  
What You Need to Know 6-6  
Multiple-Choice Lists 3-8  
Point Dish and Signal Strength 6-11  
System Diagnostic Tests 3-11  
System Menu Structure 3-6  
System Setup 1-2, 3-10  
User Preferences 3-11  
Wiring from the Antenna to the Recorder 7-11  
Wiring Your System Together 7-18  
Your Broadcast TV Antenna 3-13  
Installation and Setup 6-1  
Installation Kit 6-7  
Page I-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User and  
Installation Guide  
Mode Button 2-9  
Modes  
Changing Channels via the Program Guide 4-9  
Changing Modes on the Remote 3-2  
Changing the Name of a Favorites List 4-17  
Changing the System Password 4-27  
Channeling Up or Down 3-4  
Deleting a Channel from the Selected Channels  
List 3-17  
Changing on the Remote 3-2  
Programming the Remote Control 4-39  
Programming the Remote for Other Equipment 4-39  
Modulator Connections 7-19, A-8  
Mounting Brackets 6-5  
Mounting Sites 6-13  
Displaying Menus 3-7  
Weather and Wind Considerations 6-13  
Mounting the Antenna on Brick 6-15  
Mounting the Antenna on Cinder Block 6-17  
Mounting the Antenna on Siding 6-16  
Mounting the Antenna on the Roof 6-18  
Mounting the Antenna on Wood 6-19  
Multiple Receivers 7-18  
Editing the Name of a Channel 3-19  
Electronic Mail 4-30  
Event Timers 5-22  
Favorites Lists 4-14  
Highlighting a Menu Option 3-7  
Highlighting and Selecting a Choice in a List 3-8  
Locking the Recorder Front Panel Buttons 4-23  
Locking the System 4-25, 4-26  
Opening the Main Menu 3-10  
Opening the Program Guide 4-7  
Ordering Pay Per View Programs 4-13  
Programming the Remote Control 4-39  
Remote Control Power Scan 4-41  
Security Features 4-19  
Selecting a Favorites List to Filter Channels 4-18  
Selecting a Menu Option 3-7  
Selecting a Program Using Themes 4-12  
Selecting Channels in a Favorites List 4-15  
Setting Locks by Channels 4-20  
Setting Locks by Rating Codes 4-22  
Software Upgrades 4-31  
Mute Button 2-10  
N
O
National Electrical Code (NEC) A-3  
NEC A-3  
Next-Function Memory 5-16  
Number Pad Buttons 2-12  
On-Screen Program Guide 1-4  
Opening the Main Menu 3-10  
Opening the Program Guide 4-7  
Optional Installation Kit 6-7  
Ordering a Pay Per View Program 4-13  
Ordering Your Programming 7-17  
System Diagnostic Tests 4-36  
Turning On the System 3-4  
Unlocking the Recorder Buttons 4-24  
Unlocking the System 4-26  
Using Caller ID 5-20  
P
Using Ch 000 in the Channels List 3-18  
Using the Browse Banner 4-3  
Viewing Program Information for Other  
Channels 4-3  
Package Contents 6-3  
Parental/System Locks 1-4, 4-19  
Parts of Your System 2-1  
Password  
Changing 4-27  
Entering 4-24, 4-25  
Pause Button 2-3, 2-13  
Pay Per View  
Ordering a Program 4-13  
Programs A-8  
Purchase Information 3-11  
Personal Identification Number (PIN) 4-29  
PIN 4-29  
Play Button 2-3, 2-13  
Playback 5-2  
Point Dish and Signal Strength Menu 6-11  
Power Button 2-1, 2-9  
Power Light 2-2  
Viewing Programs in Other Languages 4-33  
Program Banner 4-1  
Program Guide 1-4, 4-6, A-8  
Adding Local or Cable Channels 3-14  
Changing Channels 4-9  
Channel Order 4-35  
Closing 4-10  
Opening 4-7  
Scanning Through Channels 4-8  
Viewing Information About Programs 4-10  
Programming the Remote Control 4-39  
Programming the Remote for Other Equipment 4-39  
Programs A-8  
Available Services 1-5  
Blacked-Out A-7  
Event Timers 5-22  
On-Screen Program Guide 1-4  
Ordering Pay Per View 4-13  
Ordering Your Programming 7-17  
Select Using Themes 4-12  
Themes 1-4  
Type 5-22  
Power Scan 4-41  
Preferences, User 3-11  
Problems and Solutions Tables A-10  
Procedures  
About the Program Banner 4-1  
About the Program Guide 4-6  
About Themes 4-11  
Adding Local or Cable Channels 3-14  
Canceling a Procedure 3-5  
Changing Channels 3-4  
Viewing in Other Languages 4-33  
Page I-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INDEX  
I
Record Button 2-3, 2-13  
Record Safety Tab 5-4  
Recording 5-3  
Reducing UHF Remote Control Range 4-41  
Remote Control 1-4, 2-7  
About the IR Remote 2-8  
About the UHF Remote 2-8  
Address Button 2-12  
Q
R
Quick Install 7-22  
Quick Start Tips 1-6  
Radio Frequency (RF) A-9  
Radio Interference A-2  
Rating Code Locks 4-22  
Rating Codes A-8  
Recall Button 2-13  
Recorder 2-1  
Auto Track Button 2-12  
Buttons 2-9  
Cable TV Box Codes 4-45  
Cancel Button 2-12  
Changing Modes 3-2  
Counter Reset Button 2-13  
Determining the Current Settings 4-43  
Diagnostic Test 4-36  
Equipment Codes for Programming the Remote 4-44  
Fast Forward Button 2-13  
FF/Browse Button 2-12  
Guide Button 2-10  
Index Button 2-12  
Info Button 2-11  
Installing Batteries 6-8  
IR Remote 2-8  
Menu Button 2-10  
Mode Button 2-9  
Mute Button 2-10  
Pause Button 2-13  
Play Button 2-13  
Power Button 2-9  
Power Scan 4-41  
Programming for Other Equipment 4-39  
Equipment Codes 4-44  
Programming the Remote Control 4-39  
Recall Button 2-13  
Access Door 2-1  
Accessory Jack 2-4  
AC-3 (Dolby Digital Output) 2-6  
Auxiliary Phono (RCA) Audio/Video Input 2-3  
Back Panel 2-4  
Cassette Loading Slot 2-1  
Changing the system Password 4-27  
Channel 3/4 Switch 2-5  
Connecting to a Telephone Line 7-15  
D-VHS Indicator 2-1  
Diagnostic Test 4-36  
Eject Button 2-3  
EP Light 2-2  
FF Button 2-3  
Front Panel 2-1  
High Speed Data Port 2-6  
Info Button 2-2  
Locking the Recorder Front Panel Buttons 4-23  
Menu Button 2-2  
Pause Button 2-3  
Pause Light 2-2  
Phono (RCA) Audio/Video Output 2-5  
Play Button 2-3  
Power Button 2-1  
Power Light 2-2  
Rec Button 2-3  
Rec Light 2-2  
Rew Button 2-3  
Satellite Ant. In 2-4  
Security Locks 1-4, 4-19  
Select Button 2-2  
Setting Locks by Channels 4-20  
Setting Locks by Rating Codes 4-22  
Setting the Remote Address 3-2  
Stop Button 2-3  
S-VIDEO Output 2-5  
Telephone Jack 2-6  
Timer Light 2-2  
TV/VCR Button 2-3  
VHF/UHF Ant. In (RF or VHF Connection) 2-4  
RF Out (RF or VHF Connection) 2-5  
UHF Remote Antenna 2-5  
Unlocking the Recorder Buttons 4-24  
Up/Down/Left/Right Arrow Buttons 2-2  
Wiring from the Antenna 7-11  
Wiring to Other Equipment 7-18  
Record Button 2-13  
Reducing UHF Remote Control Range 4-41  
Rewind Button 2-13  
Rew/Browse Button 2-12  
Select Button 2-11  
Setting the RemoteAddress 3-2  
Skip Button 2-12  
Stop Button 2-13  
Television Codes 4-44  
Tuners/Amplifiers Codes 4-45  
TV/VCR Button 2-9  
UHF Remote 2-8  
UHF Remote Address 2-8  
Up/Down/Left/Right Arrow Buttons 2-10  
VCR Codes 4-45  
View Button 2-11  
Volume Button 2-10  
Repeat Playback 5-15  
Rewind Button 2-13  
RF A-9  
RF Connections 7-19  
Roof, Mounting the Satellite Antenna 6-18  
Page I-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User and  
Installation Guide  
Servicing Your System A-25  
Setting Locks by Channels 4-20  
Setting Locks by Rating Codes 4-22  
Setting the Remote Address 3-2  
Siding, Mounting the Satellite Antenna 6-16  
Signal  
Diagnostic Test 4-38  
Single Output LNBF 6-4  
Skip Search 5-7  
Slow Motion Playback 5-9  
Smart Card 2-1  
Software Upgrades 4-31  
Sound Quality 1-4  
S
Safety  
Instructions ii  
Recommendations 6-13, 6-14  
SAP (Second Audio Program) 5-18  
Satellite Antenna 2-14, A-9  
Aiming for the Strongest Signal 7-12  
Cable Clip (Optional) 6-5  
Components 6-4  
Dish 6-5  
Dual Output LNBF 6-4  
Finding the Satellites 6-9  
Fine-Tuning the Aim 7-12  
Grounding and Wiring 7-8  
Installation 7-1  
Installing on a Metal Pole 7-6  
LNBF 6-4  
Mast Assembly 6-5  
Specifications A-24  
Starting  
Quick Tips 1-6  
Starting Your Installation 6-1  
Stereo Sound Connections 7-19  
Still Picture Playback 5-9  
Stop Button 2-13  
Structure of Menus 3-6  
Summary  
Features 1-3  
Installation 6-2  
Superimpose 5-12  
S-Video A-9  
S-Video Connections 7-20  
System Diagnostic Tests 3-11, 4-36  
System Locks 4-19  
System Menu Structure 3-6  
System Setup 1-2  
Mount Installation 7-2  
Mounting Bracket 6-5  
Mounting Bracket and Mast Assembly 6-5  
Mounting on Brick 6-15  
Mounting on Cinder Block 6-17  
Mounting on Siding 6-16  
Mounting on the Roof 6-18  
Mounting on Wood 6-19  
Mounting Sites 6-13  
Single Output LNBF 6-4  
Satellite Ant. In 2-4  
Satellite Television 1-2  
System/Parental Locks 1-4  
Satellites  
Finding the Direction and Elevation 6-10  
Locating Approximately 6-9  
Second Audio 5-18  
T
Security  
Tape Position Indicator 4-2  
Tape Speed Setting 5-5  
Telephone Communication A-1  
Telephone Connection  
Diagnostic Test 4-38  
Telephone Jack 2-6  
Telephone Line  
Connecting the Recorder 7-15  
Television Codes 4-44  
Accessing a Locked Item 4-24, 4-25  
Changing the System Password 4-27  
Discarding All Setup Information 4-28  
Locking the Recorder Front Panel Buttons 4-23  
Locking the System 4-25, 4-26  
Personal Identification Number 4-29  
Security Features 4-19  
Security Locks 1-4, 4-19  
Service Center 4-29  
Television, Satellite 1-2  
Setting Locks by Channels 4-20  
Setting Locks by Rating Codes 4-22  
Unlocking the Recorder Buttons 4-24  
Unlocking the System 4-26  
Security Features 4-19  
Tests, System Diagnostic 3-11, 4-36  
Themes 1-4, 4-11  
Displaying Programs by Theme 4-11  
Selecting a Program in the Themes List 4-12  
Timers, Event 5-22  
Parental and System Locks 4-19  
Select Button 2-2, 2-11  
Selecting  
Auto-Tune Event Timers 5-22  
Create a Manual Event Timer 5-26  
Create an Event Timer 5-24  
Daily Event Timers 5-28  
Deleting a Conflicting Event Timer 5-29  
Deleting an Event Timer 5-29  
Frequency Choices 5-26  
A Program Using Themes 4-11  
Channels in a Favorites List 4-15  
Favorites List to Filter Channels 4-18  
Menu Option 3-7  
Service Center 1-1, A-25  
Service Center Security 4-29  
Services  
Maximum Number of Event Timers Allowed 5-29  
Mon-Fri Event Timers 5-28  
Available Programming 1-5  
Service Center 1-1  
World Wide Web home page 1-1  
Page I-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INDEX  
I
Once Event Timers 5-26  
Power Off and Event Timers 5-32  
Reminder Event Timers 5-22  
Restricted Programs and Event Timers 5-32  
Reviewing Event Timers 5-32  
Scheduling Conflicts 5-29  
Types of Event Timers 5-22  
VCR Event Timers 5-22  
Weekly Event Timers 5-26  
Tips for Quick Start 1-6  
Troubleshooting  
System Diagnostic Tests 3-11  
Tuners/Amplifiers Codes 4-45  
Turning On the System 3-4  
TV/VCR Button 2-9  
Types of Cabling and Connections 7-18  
U
UHF A-9  
UHF Attenuator 4-41  
UHF Remote 2-8  
UHF Remote Address 2-8  
UHF Remote Antenna 2-5  
Ultra-High Frequency (UHF) A-9  
Unlocking the Recorder Buttons 4-24  
Unlocking the System 4-26  
Unpacking and Checking Contents 6-3  
Up/Down/Left/Right Arrow Buttons 2-2, 2-10  
Uplink Center 1-2  
Uplink Center Mail 1-4  
User Preferences 3-11  
Using Favorites Lists 4-14  
Using the System 4-1  
V
VCR Codes 4-45  
VCR Features 5-1  
Very-High Frequency (VHF) A-9  
VHF A-9  
Video Connection A-9  
Video Stabilizer 5-11  
View Button 2-11  
Viewing Program Information for Other Channels 4-4  
Volume Button 2-10  
W
Warranty, Limited A-26  
Weather and Wind Considerations 6-13  
Welcome 1-1  
Wiring and Grounding the Satellite Antenna 7-8  
Wiring from the Antenna to the Recorder 7-11  
Wiring Setups 7-21  
Wiring Your System Together 7-18  
Wood, Mounting the Satellite Antenna 6-19  
World Wide Web home page 1-1  
Page I-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User and  
Installation Guide  
NOTES  
Page I-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JVC COMPANY OF AMERICA  
DIVISION OF US JVC CORP.  
41 Slater Drive, Elmwood Park, N.J. 07407  
To subscribe to programming, or for  
assistance with installing or using the  
system, call the DISH Network Service Center at  
1-800-333-3474,  
or see the Dish Network's home page at  
http://www.dishnetwork.com  
on the World Wide Web.  
For warranty service,  
or for information about the features  
and operation of the HM-DSR100U  
call JVC at  
1-800-252-5722.  
For more information on JVC products  
see JVC's home page at  
http://www.jvc.com  
on the World Wide Web.  
0P9ri9n7teMdNinV*JaUpNan*YP  
U
COPYRIGHT © 1997 VICTOR COMPANY OF JAPAN, LTD.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Indesit Oven FIU20 User Manual
Insignia MP3 Docking Station NS S4000 User Manual
Intermec Printer PK80 User Manual
JL Audio Car Amplifier e1200 User Manual
JVC Flat Panel Television 0808TKH FU FU User Manual
Kathrein Satellite TV System 300 HDP 170 User Manual
Kenwood Car Stereo System KDC 232MR User Manual
KitchenAid Cooktop KHIF 9010 User Manual
Kodak Projector V600 Zoom User Manual
Kolcraft Stroller S45J R7 User Manual